2015 Elantra

User Manual: 2015-elantra

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 668

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp

6/23/2014

2:59 PM

Page 1

OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may
be carried out.
This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply
to your specific vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp

6/23/2014

2:59 PM

Page 2

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect
the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal
or state agencies.

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is
possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely
affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio
manufacturer's instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

F2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp

6/23/2014

2:59 PM

Page 3

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:

WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you
or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the
warning.

CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

✽ NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

F3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp

6/23/2014

2:59 PM

Page 4

FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who
drive HYUNDAI. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build is something of
which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. It is suggested that you
read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new
car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance
that may be required.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this HYUNDAI, please
leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do
not meet HYUNDAI specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2014 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor America.

F4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp

6/23/2014

2:59 PM

Page 5

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS
1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the
same parts used by HYUNDAI
Motor Company to manufacture
vehicles. They are designed and
tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability to our
customers.

2. Why should you use genuine
parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are
engineered and built to meet rigid
manufacturing requirements.
Using imitation, counterfeit or
used salvage parts is not covered
under the HYUNDAI New Vehicle
Limited Warranty or any other
HYUNDAI warranty.
In addition, any damage to or failure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or failure of an imitation, counterfeit or
used salvage part is not covered
by any HYUNDAI Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasing HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts Logo on the package (see
below).
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts exported to the U.S. are packaged with
labels written only in English.
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only
sold through authorized HYUNDAI
Dealerships.

F5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp

6/23/2014

2:59 PM

Page 6

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp

6/23/2014

2:59 PM

Page 7

Introduction
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / Vehicle data collection and event
data recorders

Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment

Safety features of your vehicle
Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag

Features of your vehicle
Keys / Door locks / Trunk / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors /
Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.

table of contents

Driving your vehicle
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system /
Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.

What to do in an emergency
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.

Maintenance
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid /
Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP

8/28/2014

5:02 PM

Page 1

Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Other fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . 1-6

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP

8/28/2014

5:02 PM

Page 2

Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strongly
recommend that you read the entire
manual. In order to minimize the
chance of death or injury, you must
read the WARNING and CAUTION
sections in this manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about features, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents. A
good place to start is the index; it has
an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual.

Sections: This manual has eight
chapters plus an index. Each chapter
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that chapter has the information you want.

You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this
manual. These WARNINGs were prepared to enhance your personal safety. You should carefully read and follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.

WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury, or death could result if
the warning is ignored.

CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.

✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.

1 2

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP

8/28/2014

5:02 PM

Page 3

Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 or
higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.

CAUTION
Never add any fuel system
cleaning agents to the fuel tank
other than what has been specified. (Consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.)

WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.

Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI
recommends that customers do not
use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 10 percent.

CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any
performance problems caused
by the use of “E85” fuel.

CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use
of any gasohol product which
impairs driveability.

1 3

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP

8/28/2014

5:02 PM

Page 4

Introduction

Other fuels
Using fuels such as,
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metallic additives contained
fuels,
may cause vehicle and engine damage. Also the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may illuminate or cause
plugging, misfiring, poor acceleration, engine stalling, catalyst melting,
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction, etc.

✽ NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warrenty.

Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
HYUNDAI does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emission control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.

CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage
to the fuel system and any performance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels containing methanol.
1 4

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasolines treated with
detergent additives such as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline, which help
prevent deposit formation in the
engine. These gasolines will help the
engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go
to the website (www.toptiergas.com).
For customers who do not use TOP
Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, additives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline. If TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive added to
the fuel tank at every 7,500 miles or
every engine oil change is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use
them. Do not mix other additives.

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP

8/28/2014

5:02 PM

Page 5

Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.

No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you
may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Items contained in motor vehicles or emitted from them are
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or reproductive harm.
These include:
• Gasoline and its vapors
• Engine exhaust
• Used engine oil
• Interior passenger compartment components and materials
• Component parts which are
subject to heat and wear
In addition, battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead, lead compounds
and other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.

1 5

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP

8/28/2014

5:02 PM

Page 6

Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

1 6

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.

Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview (front).
I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Exterior overview (rear)
II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW I
■ Front

1. Hood......................................................4-29

6. Tires and wheels ..................................7-47

2. Windows ................................................4-24

7. Headlight ..............................................7-76

3. Sunroof* ................................................4-34

8. Fog light* ..............................................7-80

4. Removable towing hook* ......................6-29

9. Side repeater light*................................7-80

5. Wiper blade ..........................................7-41

*: if equipped
OMD014005N

2 2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW II
■ Rear

1. Door lock ..............................................4-14

4. Outside rearview mirror ........................4-48

2. Trunk......................................................4-21

5. Antenna ..............................................4-120

3. Fuel filler lid ..........................................4-31

6. Rear combination lamp ........................7-81

OMD014006N

2 3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Inside door handle.............................4-16
2. Outside rearview mirror control
switch* ...............................................4-49
3. Central door lock switch ....................4-17
4. Power window lock switch*................4-27
5. Power window switches.....................4-24
6. Hood release lever ............................4-29
7. Active ECO ........................................5-41
8. Instrument panel illumination.............4-52
9. ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
OFF button ........................................5-34
10. Fuse box ...........................................7-64
11. Brake pedal .....................................5-29
12. Accelerator pedal .....................5-8, 5-15
13. Trunk lid release lever......................4-21
14. Fuel filler door opener .....................4-31
15. Steering wheel.................................4-38
16. Steering wheel tilt lever ...................4-39
17. Inside rearview mirror......................4-42
*: if equipped

OMD014001N

2 4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Instrument cluster..............................4-51
2. Horn...................................................4-41
3. Driver’s front air bag ..........................3-47
4. Light control/Turn signals .........4-72, 4-75
5. Wiper/Washer ....................................4-81
6. Key ignition switch*/
Engine start/stop button*..............5-5, 5-9
7. Cruise control switch*........................5-43
8. Audio remote control* ......................4-121
9. Digital clock .....................................4-113
10. Audio controls* ...................4-135, 4-187
11. Hazard warning flasher switch ..........6-2
12. Climate control system...........4-84, 4-94
13. Shift lever ...............................5-18, 5-22
14. Parking brake ..................................5-30
15. Passenger’s front air bag.................3-47
16. Glove box.......................................4-111
17. Seat warmer*...................................3-19
18. Cup holder.....................................4-115
* : if equipped
❈ The actual instrument panel in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OMD014002N

2 5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-31
2. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-30
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ................7-35
4. Positive battery terminal ....................7-43
5. Negative battery terminal ..................7-43
6. Fuse box............................................7-66
7. Air cleaner .........................................7-37
8. Radiator cap ......................................7-32
9. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-33
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir....7-36

❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OMD070047N

2 6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle
Important safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Always wear your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Restrain all children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Air bag hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Driver distraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Control your speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
• Keep your vehicle in safe condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
• Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
• Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
• Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
• Seat warmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
• Where are the air bags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• What to expect after an air bag inflates . . . . . . . . . 3-54
• Occupant Classification System (OCS)
. . . . . . . . 3-55
• Why Didn’t My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? . . . 3-60
• SRS care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
• Additional safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
• Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
• Seat belt safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
• Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
• Additional seat belt safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Child restraint system (CRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
• Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) . . . . . . . . 3-35
• Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS). . . . . . . . 3-37

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this manual. The safety precautions in this section are among the most important.

Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air bags,
ALWAYS make sure you and your
passengers wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

Restrain all children

Driver distraction

All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.

Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, especially for inexperienced drivers. Safety
should be the first concern when
behind the wheel and drivers need to
be aware of the wide array of potential
distractions, such as drowsiness,
reaching for objects, eating, personal
grooming, other passengers, and
using cellular phones, to name a few.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driving. To reduce your risk of distraction
or getting into an accident:
• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices
(i.e., MP3 players, phones, navigation units, etc.) when your vehicle is
parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device when
allowed by laws and when conditions
permit safe use. NEVER text or
email while driving. Most states have
laws prohibiting drivers from texting.
Some states and cities also prohibit
drivers from using handheld phones.

Air bag hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and shorter adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

3 2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving. You
have a responsibility to your passengers and others on the road to
always drive safely, with your hands
on the wheel as well as your eyes
and attention on the road.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
failure can be extremely hazardous. To
reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and
condition frequently, and perform all
regularly scheduled maintenance.

Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

3 3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle
SEATS
Driver’s seat
■ Type A

■ Type B

(1) Seat adjustment, forward/rearward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(4) Lumbar support*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Headrest adjustment

■ Manual seat

Front passenger seat
(7) Seat adjustment, forward/rearward
(8) Seatback recliner
(9) Seat warmer*
(10) Headrest adjustment

■ Power seat

Rear seat
(11) Seat warmer*
(12) Armrest
(13) Headrest adjustment
(14) Seat back folding knob (trunk)*
* : if equipped

OUD034001N

3 4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Safety precautions
Adjusting the seats so that you are sitting in a safe, comfortable position
plays an important role in driver and
passenger safety together with the
seat belts and air bags in an accident.

WARNING
Do not use a cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and the passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate normally.

Air bags
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. Sitting too close to an air bag
greatly increases the risk of injury in
the event the air bag inflates.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at least 10
inches (25 cm) between the center of
the steering wheel and their chest.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following precautions:
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far to
the rear as possible while maintaining the ability to maintain
full control of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible.
• Hold the steering wheel by the
rim with hands at the 9 o’clock
and 3 o’clock positions to minimize the risk of injuries to your
hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or anyone between the steering wheel
and the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the risk
of leg injuries.

Seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip.
At all times, passengers should sit
upright and be properly restrained.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in appropriate child
restraint systems. Children who have
outgrown a booster seat and adults
must be restrained using the seat
belts.

3 5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat belt:
• NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback
upright with the lap portion of
the seat belt snug and low
across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or small
infants to ride in a passenger’s
lap.
• Do not route the seat belt
across your neck, across sharp
edges, or reroute the shoulder
strap away from your body.
• Do not allow the seat belt to
become caught or jammed.

Front seats

WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat:
• NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond
with unexpected movement
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
• Do not place anything under
the front seats. Loose objects
in the driver’s foot area could
interfere with the operation of
the foot pedals, causing an
accident.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position
and proper locking of the seatback.
• Do not place a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may exit
out of the lighter causing a fire.

3 6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING
To prevent injury:
• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt.
Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or
fingers to get caught in the
seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.

Safety features of your vehicle

Manual adjustment

Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protection of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING
OMD030003
OMD030002

Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move
forward and rearward without using
the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.

Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to
lock.)

NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.

3 7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.

Power adjustment
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion. Before
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily control
the steering wheel, foot pedals and
controls on the instrument panel.

WARNING
OMD030004

Seat cushion height
(for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
• Push down on the lever several
times, to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up on the lever several times,
to raise the seat cushion.

3 8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

NEVER allow children in the
vehicle unattended. The power
seats are operable when the
engine is turned off.

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING
To prevent damage to the seats:
• Always stop adjusting the
seats when the seat has been
adjusted as far forward or
rearward as possible.
• Do not adjust the seats longer
than necessary when the
engine is turned off. This may
result in unnecessary battery
drain.
• Do not operate two or more
seats at the same time. This
may result in an electrical malfunction.

OMD030006

OMD030007

Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.

Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seatback reaches the desired position.

3 9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING
NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.

3 10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

OMD030008

Seat cushion height
(for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or push down to
lower the front part of the seat
cushion. Pull the rear portion of
the control switch up to raise or
push down to lower the rear part of
the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.

Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback pocket

WARNING
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure occupants.

OMD030009

Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
To adjust the lumbar support:
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support or the
rear portion of the switch to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.

OMD030013

The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front seatbacks.

WARNING
To prevent the occupant classification system from malfunctioning:
• Do not place any items total
weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) in
the seatback pocket on the
passenger’s seat.
• Do not hang onto the front
passenger’s seatback.

3 11
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Rear seats
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.

To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
2.Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.

WARNING
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This
could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

OMD030026

3.Pull on the seatback folding lever
located in the trunk.

3 12
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

OMD031028N

4.Fold the seatback toward the front
of the vehicle.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback rearward. Pull the
seatback firmly until it clicks into
place. Make sure the seatback is
locked in place.
When you return the seatback to
its upright position, always be sure
it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.
6. Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.

When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.

WARNING
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.

WARNING
Make sure the engine is off, the
shift lever is in P (Park), and the
parking brake is securely
applied whenever loading or
unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is
inadvertently moved to another
position.

3 13
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Armrest

CAUTION

OMD030031
OMD030029N

The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down from the seatback to use it.
You will find cup holders on the center armrest.

Carrying long/narrow cargo
(if equipped)
Pull the armrest down using the strap
provided on the armrest. Pull the
cover down while pushing the release
lever (1) down. Additional cargo
space is provided to accommodate
long/narrow cargo (skis, poles, lumber, etc.) not able to fit properly in the
trunk when closed.

3 14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

• Make sure the engine is off,
the transaxle is in P and the
parking brake is applied
whenever loading or unloading cargo. Vehicle may move if
shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.
• Be careful when loading cargo
through the rear passenger
seats to prevent damage to
the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from
moving while driving.
Unsecured cargo in the passenger compartment can
cause damage to the vehicle
or injury to it’s occupants.

Safety features of your vehicle

Headrest
The vehicle’s front and rear seats
have adjustable headrests. The headrests provide comfort for passengers,
but more importantly they are
designed to help protect passengers
from whiplash and other neck and
spinal injuries during an accident,
especially in a rear impact collision.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident,
take the following precautions
when adjusting your headrests:
• Always properly adjust the
headrests for all passengers
BEFORE starting the vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat
with the headrest removed.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Adjust the headrests so the
middle of the headrests is at
the same height as the height
of the top of the eyes.

Front seat headrest

• NEVER adjust the headrest
position of the driver’s seat
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Adjust the headrest as close
to the passenger’s head as
possible. Do not use a seat
cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback.
• Make sure the headrest locks
into position after adjusting it.

OMG038400

The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats are equipped with adjustable
headrests for the passengers safety
and comfort.

WARNING
To prevent damage, NEVER hit
or pull on the headrests.

3 15
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

■ Type A

CAUTION

OMD034062
OMD030010

Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).

■ Type B

OYFH034205

If you recline the seatback
towards the front with the headrest and seat cushion raised,
the headrest may come in contact with the sunvisor or other
parts of the vehicle.
OMD034011

Removal/Reinstall
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).

3 16
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

■ Type A

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.

Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it properly.

OMD034063
■ Type B

OMD034012

To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.
3 17
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Rear seat headrest

ONF039401

The rear seats are equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the passenger’s safety and comfort.

OMD030015

OMD030016

Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

Removal/Reinstall
To remove the headrest:
1. Raise the headrest as far as it can
go.
2. Press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).

To lower the headrest:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).

3 18
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.

Safety features of your vehicle

To reinstall the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback.
2. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.

WARNING
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.

Seat warmers
Seat warmers are provided to warm
the seats during cold weather.

WARNING
The seat warmers can cause a
SERIOUS BURN, even at low
temperatures and especially if
used for long periods of time.
Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too warm
so they can turn it off, if needed.
People who cannot detect temperature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme caution, especially the following
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
• Intoxicated individuals.
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.

WARNING
NEVER place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in operation, such as a blanket or seat
cushion. This may cause the
seat warmer to overheat, causing a burn or damage to the seat.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the seat
warmers and seats:
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline to clean the
seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers.

3 19
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat warmers (if equipped)

Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
) → LOW (

■ Left

■ Right

)

→

OFF → HIGH (

Rear seat warmers (if equipped)

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position.

✽ NOTICE
OMD034014

While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.

With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

OMD030025

While the engine is running, push
either switch to warm the rear seat.
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.

✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.

3 20
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
This section describes how to use the
seat belts properly. It also describes
some of the things not to do when
using seat belts.

Seat belt safety precautions
Always fasten your seat belt and
make sure all passengers have fastened their seat belts before starting
any trip. Air bags are designed to
supplement the seat belt as an additional safety device, but they are not a
substitute. Most states require all
occupants of a vehicle to wear seat
belts.

WARNING
Seat belts must be used by ALL
passengers whenever the vehicle is moving. Take the following
precautions when adjusting and
wearing seat belts:
• ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the
rear seats.
• NEVER allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If
a child age 13 or older must be
seated in the front seat, move
the seat as far back as possible and properly restrain them
in the seat belt.
• NEVER allow an infant or child
to be carried on an occupant’s
lap.
• NEVER ride with the seatback
reclined when the vehicle is
moving.
• Do not allow children to share
a seat or seat belt.
• Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
twisted. A twisted seat belt
will not protect you properly
in an accident.
• Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is damaged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into
the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle interfering with the
seat belt latch mechanism.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.

3 21
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING
Damaged seat belts and seat
belt assemblies will not operate
properly. Always replace:
• Frayed, contaminated, or damaged webbing
• Damaged hardware
• The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to
webbing or assembly is not
apparent

Seat belt warning light

Conditions

Seat belt warning light
(for driver’s seat)

Seat Belt

Vehicle
Speed

Unbuckled
Buckled

Buckled →
Unbuckled

Warning Pattern
Light (Blink)

Chime

6 seconds
6 seconds

None

Below 3 mph
6 seconds
(5 km/h)

None

3 mph~
6 mph

6 seconds

Above 6 mph 6 sec. ON / 24 sec. OFF
(10 km/h)
(11 times)

Unbuckled
OLMB033022

The driver’s seat belt warning light
and chime will come on according to
the following table when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.

3 22
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)

6 seconds *1

↓
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)

Stop *2

↓

*1 : The Warning Pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's
seat belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.
*2 : The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt restraint system
Seat Belt-Driver’s 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:

The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt
portion is adjusted manually so that it
fits snugly around your hips. If you
lean forward in a slow, easy motion,
the belt will extend and move with
you. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position.
It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
four different positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder nearest the door, not over your neck.

✽ NOTICE

B180A01NF-1

If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from the
retractor, firmly pull the seat belt out
and release it. After release, you will
be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab (1) into the
buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.

3 23
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

■ Front seat

WARNING

OHD036019

To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position.

• Verify the shoulder belt
anchor is locked into position
at the appropriate height.
Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious
injuries in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts
after an accident could leave
you with damaged seat belts
that will not provide protection in the event of another
collision leading to personal
injury or death. Replace your
seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.

3 24
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

OLMB033025

WARNING
Improperly positioned seat belts
may increase the risk of serious
injury in an accident. Take the following precautions when adjusting the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly.
(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)
• Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other over
the belt, as shown in the illustration.
• Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into the locked
position at the appropriate
height.
• Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.

Seat Belt – Passenger’s 3-point
system with combination locking
retractor
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt.
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat positions
to help accommodate the installation
of child restraint systems. Although a
combination retractor is also installed
in the front passenger seat position,
NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.

To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab into the
buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor
Type). It automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt
portion of the seat belt is adjusted
manually so that it fits snugly across
your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a Child Restraint
System” in this chapter.

3 25
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Although the seat belt retractor provides the same level of protection for
seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes,
the emergency locking mode allows
seated passengers to move freely in
their seat while keeping some tension
on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically
locks the belt to help restrain your
body. To deactivate the automatic
locking mode, allow the unbuckled
seat belt to fully retract.

OMD030018N

B180A01NF-1

When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.

To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

3 26
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD)
Emergency Fastening Device(EFD),
which is a supplement system of the
seat belts, protects the driver and
front passenger's lower body by
pulling the pelvis back instantly in
certain frontal collisions.
The EFD may be activated in crashes where the frontal collision is
severe enough.
OED030300

Retractor Pre-tensioner
The retractor pre-tensioner, which is
a supplement system of the seat
belts and airbags, helps the driver
and front passenger's upper body to
be fastened surely to the seat by
pulling the shoulder back instantly in
certain frontal collisions.
The retractor pre-tensioner may be
activated in crashes where the
frontal collision is severe enough.
The retractor pre-tensioner will be
activated with the airbags.

✽ NOTICE
The pre-tensioner will activate not
only in a frontal collision but also in
a side collision, if the vehicle is
equipped with a side or curtain air
bag.

WARNING
Pre-Tensioner Seat Belts that
malfunction may not protect you
properly during an accident.
Take the following precautions:
• Always wear your seat belt
and sit properly in your seat.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.
• Do not place anything near the
buckle. This may adversely
affect the buckle and cause it
to function improperly.
• Always replace your pre-tensioners after activation or an
accident.
• NEVER inspect, service, repair
or replace the pre-tensioners
yourself. This must be done by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not hit the seat belt assemblies.

3 27
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

WARNING
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism
fires during a collision the pretensioner becomes hot and can
burn you.
1LDE3100/Q

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System
consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in
the illustration above:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly

3 28
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

The sensor that activates the SRS air
bag is connected with the pre–tensioner seat belts. The SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate for approximately 6
seconds after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, and then it
should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner is not working
properly, the warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag is not
malfunctioning. If the warning light
does not illuminate, stays illuminated
or illuminates when the vehicle is
being driven, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pretensioner seat belts and SRS air bags
as soon as possible.

Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts
may be activated in certain frontal
or side collisions.
• The pre-tensioners will not be activated if the seat belts are not worn
at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation and
should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly after an
accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

Additional seat belt safety precautions
Seat belt use during pregnancy
The seat belt should always be used
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect
yourself by always wearing the seat
belt.
Pregnant women should always wear
a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the
shoulder belt across your chest, routed between your breasts and away
from your neck. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest, routed away
from the neck. Place the lap belt below
the belt line so that it fits snugly and as
low as possible across the hips, not
across the abdomen.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident, pregnant women should NEVER
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or over the area of
the abdomen where the unborn
child is located.

3 29
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt use and children
Infant and small children
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices,
including booster seats. The age at
which seat belts can be used instead
of child restraints differs among
states, so you should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state,
and where you are travelling. Infant
and child restraints must be properly
placed and installed in a rear seat.
For more information refer to the
“Child Restraint Systems” in this
chapter.

WARNING
ALWAYS properly restrain infants
and small children in a child
restraint appropriate for the
child’s height and weight.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to a child and
other passengers, NEVER hold a
child in your lap or arms when
the vehicle is moving.The violent
forces created during an accident will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the interior of the vehicle.

3 30
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. Before
buying any child restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The
restraint must be appropriate for your
child's height and weight. Check the
label on the child restraint for this
information. Refer to “Child Restraint
Systems” in this chapter.

Safety features of your vehicle

Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are
too large for a booster seat must
always occupy the rear seat and use
the available lap/shoulder belts. A
seat belt should lie across the upper
thighs and be snug across the shoulder and chest to restrain the child
safely. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt
out of position. Always have the
LATCH system inspected by your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can damage
the LATCH system and may not
properly secure the child restraint.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rearmost position.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat.

WARNING
• Always make sure children
are wearing their seat belts
and that they are properly
adjusted before driving.
• NEVER allow the shoulder
belt to contact the child’s
neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one
child to use a single seat belt.

Transporting an injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
Consult a physician for specific recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.

3 31
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Do not lie down
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve the maximum effectiveness
of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the
front and rear seats should be in an
upright position when the car is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying
down in the rear seat or if the front or
rear seats are in a reclined position.

WARNING
• NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
• Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
• Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.

Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.

Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.

3 32
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

When to replace seat belts
The entire seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no
damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation
should be directed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3 33
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
WARNING
Always properly restrain children in the rear seats of the
vehicle.
Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag
resulting in SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH.

Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Even with air bags,
children can be seriously injured
or killed. Children too large for a
child restraint must use the seat belts
provided.
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices. The
laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
child restraints differs among states,
so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your state, and
where you are travelling.

3 34
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Child restraint systems must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are generally
designed to be secured in a vehicle
seat by lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH system in the rear seats of the vehicle.

Safety features of your vehicle

Child restraint system (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rear-facing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
comply with the instructions for
installation and use provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.

WARNING
An improperly secured child
restraint can increase the risk
of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH
in an accident. Always take the
following precautions when
using a child restraint system:
• NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
• Always properly secure the
child restraint to a rear seat of
the vehicle.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
• Always properly restrain your
child in the child restraint.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
“hooks” over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have a
HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat
belts, tether anchors and
lower anchors.

Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213).
• Select a child restraint based on
your child’s height and weight. The
required label or the instructions
for use typically provide this information.
• Select a child restraint that fits the
vehicle seating position where it
will be used.
• Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the child
restraint system.

3 35
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Child restraint system types
There are three main types of child
restraint systems: rear-facing seats,
forward-facing seats, and booster
seats. They are classified according
to the child’s age, height and weight.

■ Rearward-facing child restraint system

Continue to use a rear-facing child
seat for as long as your child will fit
within the height and weight limits
allowed by the child seat manufacturer. It’s the best way to keep them
safe. Once your child has outgrown
the rear-facing child restraint, your
child is ready for a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness.

WARNING
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a child
seat, the headrest of the respective seating position shall be
readjusted or entirely removed.

Rear-facing child seats

WARNING
NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH if the child restraint is
struck by an inflating air bag.

CRS09

A rear-facing child seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child. The harness system holds the child in place,
and in an accident, acts to keep the
child positioned in the seat and
reduce the stress to the neck and
spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rear-facing infant child
restraint.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typically have higher height and weight
limits for the rear-facing position,
allowing you to keep your child rearfacing for a longer period of time.

3 36
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

OMD030019

Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child’s body with a
harness. Keep children in a forwardfacing child seat with a harness until
they reach the top height or weight
limit allowed by your child restraint’s
manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the forwardfacing child restraint, your child is
ready for a booster seat.

Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat
belt system. A booster seat positions
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the lap of your child. Keep your
child in a booster seat until they are
big enough to sit in the seat without a
booster and still have the seat belt fit
properly.
For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap
belt must lie snugly across the upper
thighs, not the stomach. The shoulder
belt should lie snug across the shoulder and chest and not across the neck
or face. Children under age 13 must
always ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury.

Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)

WARNING
Before installing your child
restraint system always:
• Read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.
• Read and follow the instructions regarding child restraint
systems in this manual.
Failure to follow all warnings
and instructions could increase
the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH if an accident occurs.

3 37
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

After selecting a proper child seat for
your child, check to make sure it fits
properly in your vehicle. Follow the
instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child
seat. Note these general steps when
installing the seat to your vehicle:
• Properly secure the child restraint
to the vehicle. All child restraints
must be secured to the vehicle with
the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or
with the LATCH system.
• Make sure the child restraint is
firmly secured. After installing a
child restraint to the vehicle, push
and pull the seat forward and from
side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A
child restraint secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-toside movement can be expected.

WARNING
A child restraint in a closed
vehicle can become very hot. To
prevent burns, check the seating surface and buckles before
placing your child in the child
restraint.

3 38
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children (LATCH) System
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving and in an accident. This system is designed to
make installation of the child restraint
easier and reduce the possibility of
improperly installing your child
restraint. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint. The
LATCH system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the child
restraint to the rear seats.
Lower anchors are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments.
To use the LATCH system in your
vehicle, you must have a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.
The child seat manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to
use the child seat with its attachments
for the LATCH lower anchors.

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

B230D01NF

Do not attempt to install a child
restraint system using LATCH
anchors in the rear center seating position.There are no LATCH
anchors provided for this seat.
Using the outboard seat anchors
can damage the anchors which
may break or fail in a collision
resulting in serious injury or
death.

LATCH anchors have been provided
in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There are no
LATCH anchors provided for the center rear seating position.

ISOFIX Anchor

ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator

OMD030022N

The lower anchor position indicator
symbols are located on the left and
right rear seat backs to identify the
position of the lower anchors in your
vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.

3 39
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint with
the LATCH anchors system
To install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint in either of the rear outboard
seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away from
the lower anchors.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the child
restraint and the lower anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instructions
for properly adjusting and tightening
the lower attachments on the child
restraint to the lower anchors.

WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the LATCH system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• To prevent the child from
reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts, buckle
all unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around
their neck and the seat belt
tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
anchor. This could cause the
anchor or attachment to come
loose or break.
(Continued)

3 40
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)
• Always have the LATCH system inspected by your authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can
damage the LATCH system
and may not properly secure
the child restraint.

WARNING - Weight for
LATCH system
The recommended weight for
the LATCH system is under 65lb
(30kg).
How to calculate the child
restraint weight :
Child restraint weight =
65lb (30kg) - Child weight

Safety features of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint seat
with “Tether Anchor” system

OMD030030N

First, secure the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchors or the seat
belt. If the child seat manufacturer
recommends that the tether strap be
attached, attach and tighten the
tether strap to the tether anchor.
Tether anchors are located on the
back of the rear seats.

WARNING
Take the following precautions
when installing the tether strap:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single tether anchor. This could cause
the anchor or attachment to
come loose or break.
• Do not attach the tether strap
to anything other than the correct tether anchor. It may not
work properly if attached to
something else.
• Do not use the tether anchors
for adult seat belts or harnesses, or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.

OMD030021N

To install the tether strap:
1. Route the child restraint tether
strap over the child restraint seatback. Route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, or route the tether
strap over the top of the vehicle
seatback. Make sure the strap is
not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the tether anchor, then tighten the
tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions to
firmly secure the child restraint to
the seat.

3 41
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat forward and from side-to-side.

Securing a child restraint with a
lap belt or lap/shoulder belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child restraints must be secured to
a vehicle rear seat with the lap part
of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING
ALWAYS place a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in serious injury or death
if the child restraint is struck by
an inflating air bag.

3 42
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

OLMB033044

Automatic lock mode
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency locking
mode), you must manually pull the
seat belt all the way out to shift the
retractor to the “Automatic Locking”
mode to secure a child restraint.
The “Automatic Locking” mode will
help prevent the normal movement
of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.

Safety features of your vehicle

To install a child restraint system on
the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the child
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.

✽ NOTICE
When using the rear center seat belt,
you should also refer to “3-point Rear
Center Seat Belt” in this chapter.

OLMB033045

OMD030054A

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” sound.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Automatic
Locking” (child restraint) mode.

✽ NOTICE
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emergency.

3 43
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

OMD030055A

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Automatic
Locking” mode. If no distinct sound
is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Automatic Locking” mode
by attempting to pull more of the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the
“Automatic Locking” mode.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you to use a tether
anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,
refer to the previous pages for more
information.

✽ NOTICE
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position, the
retractor will automatically switch
from the “Automatic Locking” mode
to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage.

WARNING
If the retractor is not in the
“Automatic Locking” mode, the
child restraint can move when
your vehicle turns or stops suddenly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
in the car, including manually
pulling the seat belt all the way
out to shift the rectractor to the
“Automatic Locking” mode.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.

3 44
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
Side impact air bag
Curtain air bag

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OJK032032

3 45
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

This vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Air Bag
System for the driver’s seat and front
passenger’s seats.
The front air bags are designed to
supplement the three-point seat
belts. For these air bags to provide
protection, the seat belts must be
worn at all times when driving.
You can be severely injured or killed
in an accident if you are not wearing
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to
supplement seat belts, but do not
replace them. Also, air bags are not
designed to deploy in every collision.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
the only restraint protecting you.

WARNING
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,
everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt
when the air bag inflates.
NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front
passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant
or child causing serious or fatal injuries.
ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during
an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. NHTSA recommends that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest.

3 46
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Where are the air bags?
Driver’s and passenger’s front air
bags
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts
at both the driver and passenger
seating positions.
The SRS consists of air bags which
are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The air bags are labeled with the letters “AIR BAG” embossed on the pad
covers.

■ Driver’s front air bag

WARNING

OMD030033
■ Passenger’s front air bag

OMD030034A

The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and front passengers with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system
alone. The SRS uses sensors to
gather information about the driver's
seat position, the driver's and front
passenger's seat belt usage and
impact severity.

To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
front air bags, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as
possible from front air bags,
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs on
the dashboard.
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box. Such objects could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.

3 47
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Side impact air bags

The side impact air bags are
designed to deploy only during certain
side impact collisions, depending on
the crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact.
The side impact air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact.

OMD030035

OJK032063

Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and the front passenger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
3 48
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
side impact air bag, take the following precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and seats.
• Hold the steering wheel at the 9
o’clock and 3 o’clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injuries
to your hands and arms.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers. This could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side
impact air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side
impact air bags.
• Do not cause impact to the
doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
this may cause the side air
bags to inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Curtain air bags

They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
impact.
The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact.
OMD030042

OJK032066

Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.

3 49
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
curtain air bags, take the following precautions:
• All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
properly.
• Properly secure child restraints
as far away from the door as
possible.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Do not open or repair the side
curtain air bags.

SRS components and functions

OMD030050N

The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors

3 50
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

10. PASS AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
(Front passenger’s seat only)
11. Occupant classification system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Anchor pre-tensioner
14. Side pressure sensor
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.

Safety features of your vehicle

SRS warning light

The SRS (Supplement Restraint
System) air bag warning light on the
instrument panel displays the air bag
symbol depicted in the illustration. The
system checks the air bag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light indicates that there is a potential problem
with your air bag system.

WARNING
If your SRS malfunctions, the
air bag may not inflate properly
during an accident increasing
the risk of serious injury or
death.
If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:
• The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds
when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately six
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer inspect the SRS as soon
as possible if any of these conditions occur.

During a moderate to severe frontal
collision, sensors will detect the vehicle’s rapid deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the front air bags.
The front air bags help protect the
driver and front passenger by
responding to frontal impacts in
which seat belts alone cannot provide
adequate restraint.
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of a
severe frontal or side collision to
help protect the occupants from
serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate. Generally,
air bags are designed to inflate
based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two
factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.

3 51
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles
or objects which your vehicle
impacts during a collision. The
determining factors are not limited
to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant. It is
virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you
will simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.

• To help provide protection, the air
bags must inflate rapidly. The
speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time
in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of air bag design.
However, the rapid air bag inflation
can also cause injuries which can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.

3 52
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. The greatest risk is sitting too
close to the air bag. An air bag needs
about 10 inches (25 cm) of space to
inflate. NHTSA recommends that
drivers allow at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.

Safety features of your vehicle

■ Driver’s front air bag (1)

■ Driver’s front air bag (2)

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following precautions:
• NEVER place a child restraint
in the front passenger seat.
Always properly restrain children under age 13 in the rear
seats of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger’s
and driver’s seats as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle.
• Hold the steering wheel with
hands at the 9 o’clock and 3
o’clock positions.
• Never place anything or anyone between the air bag and
the seat occupant.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs
on the dashboard.

OLMB033054

OLMB033055

When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.

3 53
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

■ Driver’s front air bag (3)

WARNING

OLMB033056
■ Passenger’s front air bag

To prevent objects from becoming dangerous projectiles when
the passenger's air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD
holder, stickers, etc.) on the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box where the passenger's air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of
liquid air freshener near the
instrument cluster or on the
instrument panel surface.

OLMB033057

After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.

3 54
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

What to expect after an air bag
inflates
After a frontal or side air bag inflates,
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer. Curtain air bags
may remain partially inflated for
some time after they deploy.

WARNING
After an air bag inflates, take
the following precautions:
• Open your windows and
doors as soon as possible
after impact to reduce prolonged exposure to the smoke
and powder released by the
inflating air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag storage area’s internal components immediately after an air
bag has inflated. The parts
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)
• Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm water and mild soap.
• Always have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the air
bag immediately after deployment. Air bags are designed to
be used only once.

Noise and smoke from inflating
air bag
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and they leave smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may
feel substantial discomfort in breathing because of the contact of your
chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. The powder may
aggravate asthma for some people. If
you experience breathing problems
after an air bag deployment, seek
medical attention immediately.
Though the smoke and powder are
nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and seek
medical attention if the symptoms
persist.

Occupant Classification
System (OCS)

OMD030047N

Your vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) in the front passenger's seat.
The OCS is designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated front
passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not. The driver's front air bag is not affected or
controlled by the OCS.

3 55
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Main components of the
Occupant Classification System
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat.
• Electronic system to determine
whether the passenger air bag
should be activated or deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag indicator light is interconnected with
the OCS.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and
wearing the seat belt properly,
should not cause the passenger air
bag to be automatically turned OFF.
However, if the occupant does not sit
in the seat properly (for example, by
not sitting upright, by sitting on the
edge of the seat, or by otherwise
being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag
OFF.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1-4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated properly
and wearing the seat belt properly for
the most effective protection by the
air bag and the seat belt.

3 56
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can affect the classification system.
These include:
• Failing to sit in an upright position.
• Leaning against the door or center
console.
• Sitting towards the sides of the
front of the seat.
• Putting their legs on the dashboard
or resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
• Wearing the seat belt improperly.
• Reclining the seatback.

Safety features of your vehicle

Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System
Indicator/Warning light
Condition detected by the
occupant classification system

Devices

“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light

SRS
warning light

Front passenger
air bag

1. Adult*1

Off

Activated

2. Infant* or child restraint system with 12 months old*3

Off

Deactivated

3. Unoccupied

Off

Deactivated

4. Malfunction in the system

Off

Activated

*1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her
physique and posture.
*2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize
him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
*3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

3 57
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING
Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger's seat when it is unoccupied by a
passenger adversely affects the OCS. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

• NEVER put a heavy load in

• NEVER ride with the seat-

the front seat or seatback
pocket.

back reclined when the
vehicle is moving.

1KMN3662

OVQ036013N

• NEVER place your feet or

• NEVER place your feet on

legs on the dashboard.

the front passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

1KMN3665

• NEVER sit with your hips

• NEVER lean on the door or

shifted towards the front
of the seat.

center console or sit on
one side of the front passenger seat.

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

3 58
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING
Never allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front passenger
seat when the “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated. During a collision, the air bag
will not inflate if the indicator is
illuminated. Have your passenger move to the rear seat.

✽ NOTICE
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the OCS
will then classify the front passenger
after several more seconds.

B990A01O

Proper seated position for OCS
If the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
indicator is on when an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, place
the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF
position and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag. If
the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.
3 59
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Do Not Install a Child Restraint in
the Front Passenger’s Seat

WARNING
• NEVER place a rear-facing or

1JBH3051

front-facing child restraint in
the front passenger’s seat of
the vehicle.
• An inflating frontal air bag
could forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always properly restrain children in an appropriate child
restraint in the rear seat of the
vehicle.

Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the OCS, never install a child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
An inflating air bag can forcefully
strike a child or restraint resulting in
serious or fatal injury.

3 60
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Why Didn’t My Air Bag Go Off
in a Collision? (Air bags are
not designed to inflate in
every collision.)
There are certain types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle
indicates a collision energy absorption, and is not an indicator of whether
or not an air bag should have inflated.

Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag collision sensors

WARNING
To reduce the risk of an air bag
deploying unexpectedly and
causing serious injury or death:
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
• Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sensors. If the location or angle of
the sensors is altered, the air
bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards
or replace the bumper with a
non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.
This may adversely affect the
collision and air bag deployment performance.
• Have all repairs conducted by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OMD030036/OMD030037/OMD030038N/OMD030039

(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
3 61
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag deployment conditions

1JBA3514

1JBA3513

Front air bag
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed, or angles of
impact of the front collision.
OJK032067

Side impact and curtain air bags
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed, or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.

3 62
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s air bags are designed to
inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side
impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate only in side
impact collisions, but they may inflate
in other collisions if the side impact
sensors detect a sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.

Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag non-deployment conditions

1JBA3515

In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts.

OBH038058

1JBA3516

Front air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not provide
any additional benefit.

Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move in the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.
However, side impact and curtain air
bags may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles
of impact.

3 63
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

OBH038060

1JBA3517

1JBA3522

In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any additional
benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.

Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle
causing it to “ride” under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "underride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
“underride” collisions.

Air bags do not inflate in rollover
accidents because vehicle can not
detect rollover accident.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over after a side impact collision.

3 64
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

SRS care

1JBA3518

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.

The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is in the
ON position, or continuously remains
on, have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger's panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, take the following precautions:
• Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS components or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure.
• Do not place objects over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, or the front passenger's panel above the glove
box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and
proper deployment of the system.
• Always have inflated air bags
replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)

3 65
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or if
the vehicle must be scrapped,
certain safety precautions
must be observed. Consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
the necessary information.
Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk of
personal injury.

Additional safety precautions
Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or
emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or be ejected
from the vehicle.
Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
seat belt can reduce the protection
provided by the seat belt and increase
the chance of serious injury in a crash
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position may cause
the air bags to inflate.

3 66
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Modifications to accommodate
disabilities. If you require modification to your vehicle to accommodate
a disability, contact the HYUNDAI
Customer Connect Center at 1-877378-8727.

Adding equipment to or modifying
your air bag equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.

Safety features of your vehicle

Be sure to read all of the information
about the air bags that are installed
on your vehicle in this Owners
Manual.

Air bag warning labels
■ Type A

OMD030040
■ Type B

OMD030040L

Air bag warning labels, required by
the U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), are
attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air
bag system.
3 67
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
Accessing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

• Remote key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
• Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

• Sunroof opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Auto door lock/unlock features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• Child-protector rear door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
• Opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
• Closing the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
• Emergency trunk safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
• Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Tilt steering / Telescope steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Driver selectable steering mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
• Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
• Transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

• Opening the fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• Closing the fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

• Exterior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
• Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

• Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
• Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

Windshield defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . 4-105

• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Steering wheel audio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• Aux, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Caring for disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote key

ONF048011

Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and trunk).
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Trunk Unlock
4. Panic

Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
trunk.
2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on
the remote key.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound
once if the lock button is pressed
once more within four seconds.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.

WARNING
Do not leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children
could place the key in the ignition switch and may operate
power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.

✽ NOTICE
After locking the doors, if you press
the Door Lock button again within
four seconds, the hazard warning
lights will blink and the horn will
sound one time to confirm that the
doors are locked.

4 3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)
on the remote key.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
If you press the Door Unlock button
again within four seconds, then all
the doors will unlock.

✽ NOTICE
After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

Trunk unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Trunk Unlock button (3)
on the remote key for more than
one second.
2. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times. Once the trunk is
opened and then closed, the trunk
will lock automatically.

✽ NOTICE
• After unlocking the trunk, the
trunk will lock automatically.
• The word "HOLD" is written on
the button to inform you that you
must press and hold the button for
more than one second.
Panic button
Press the Panic button (4) for more
than one second. The horn sounds
and hazard warning lights flash for
about 30 seconds.
To cancel the panic mode, press any
button on the remote key.

4 4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Start-up
For detailed information refer to “Key
Ignition Switch” in chapter 5.

CAUTION
To prevent damaging the remote
key:
• Keep the remote key away
from water or any liquid. If the
remote key is inoperative due
to exposure to water or other
liquids, it will not be covered
by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing
the remote key.
• Protect the remote key from
extreme temperatures.

Features of your vehicle

Mechanical key
■ Type A

Remote key precautions
■ Type B

OYDDCO2231/OYDECO2231

If the remote key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.

The remote key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The remote key battery is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The remote key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
remote key.
When the remote key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the remote key contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continue)

(Continue)
If the remote key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the remote key and
your mobile phone in the same pants
or jacket pocket and always try to
maintain an adequate distance
between the two devices.

4 5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Battery replacement
If the remote key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.

✽ NOTICE
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) and regulation.

✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the device.

CAUTION
Keep the remote key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves
to the key surface.

If you suspect your remote key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your remote key is not working correctly contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

OLM049200

Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the cover.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
remote key.

4 6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Locking

Smart key

3. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound one time.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.

✽ NOTICE
The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the outside door handle.
OMD044708

OMD044008

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Trunk Unlock
4. Panic

To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
trunk.
2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Lock button
(1) on the smart key.

4 7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for
three seconds if any of the following
occur:
• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the trunk is open.

Unlocking

✽ NOTICE

■ Driver side

• The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is
within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the
outside door handle. Other people
can also open the doors without the
smart key in possession.
• After unlocking the doors, the
doors will lock automatically after
30 seconds unless a door is opened.

WARNING
Do not leave the Smart Key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Unattended children
could press the Engine Start/
Stop button and may operate
power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.

OMD044008

To unlock:
1. Carry the Smart Key.
2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Unlock button (2) on the smart key.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound two
times.
If you press the Door Unlock button
again within four seconds, then all
the doors will unlock.

4 8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

■ Passenger’s side

OMD044008/H

1. Carry the smart key.
2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Unlock button (2) on the smart key.
3. The doors will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.

Trunk unlocking
To unlock:
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Either press the trunk handle button or press the Trunk Unlock button (3) on the smart key for more
than one second.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automatically.

Panic button
Press the Panic button (4) for more
than one second. The horn sounds
and hazard warning lights flash for
about 30 seconds.
To cancel the panic mode, press any
button on the smart key.

✽ NOTICE
After unlocking the trunk, the trunk
will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless the trunk is opened.

4 9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed information refer to the Engine Start/Stop
button in chapter 5.

Mechanical key
If the Smart Key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.

CAUTION
To prevent damaging the smart
key:
• Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the
smart key is inoperative due
to exposure to water or other
liquids, it will not be covered
by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing
the smart key.
• Protect the smart key from
extreme temperatures.

OMD044710N

Press and hold the release button (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
Insert the mechanical key into the
key hole on the door.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.

4 10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Loss of a smart key
A maximum of two smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
happen to lose your smart key, it is
recommanded that you should immediately take the vehicle and remaining
key to your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or tow the vehicle, if necessary.

Features of your vehicle

Smart key precautions
The smart key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the transmitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
• Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continue)

(Continue)
If the smart key is in close proximity
to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and your
mobile phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and always try to maintain an adequate distance between
the two devices.

✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the device.

CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves
to the key surface.

4 11
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Battery replacement

If you suspect your smart key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your smart key is not working correctly, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

✽ NOTICE

OLM043439

An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) and regulation.

If the Smart Key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Pry open the rear cover of the
smart key.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
smart key.

4 12
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly,
then go off. If the indicator starts to
blink, the system does not recognize
the coding of the key.
Place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, then place the
ignition switch to the ON position
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e., key
chain) is near the key. The engine
may not start because the metal may
interrupt the transponder signal from
transmitting normally.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of the key, contact your HYUNDAI dealer.

Features of your vehicle

Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.

WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a customer unique password and
should be kept confidential.

CAUTION
The transponder in your key is
an important part of the immobilizer system. It is designed to
give years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid
exposure to moisture, static
electricity and rough handling.
Immobilizer system malfunction
could occur.

✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the device.

4 13
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Mechanical key
■ Type A

■ Type B

Unlock
Lock

Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.

Remote key

Unlock
Lock

OMD044711N

To lock the doors, press the Door
Lock button (1) on the remote key.
Press the Door Unlock button (2) on
the remote key, the driver’s door will
unlock. If you press the Door Unlock
button on the remote key again within four seconds, then all the doors
will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.

OMD044010N

Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the front
of the vehicle to lock.
If you lock the door with a key, all
vehicle doors will lock automatically.
(if equipped with the central door
lock system)
From the driver’s door, turn the key to
the right once to unlock the driver’s
door and once more within 4 seconds
to unlock all doors. (if equipped with
the central door lock system)

4 14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.

Smart key

Lock / Unlock

OMD040008

Press the button on the outside door
handle while carrying the smart key
with you or press the door unlock
button on the smart key, the driver’s
door will unlock. If you press the
Door Unlock button on the smart key
again within four seconds, then all
the doors will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.

✽ NOTICE

OMD044709

To lock the doors, press the button on
the outside door handle while carrying the smart key with you or press
the door lock button on the smart key.

• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.

4 15
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button

Lock

Unlock

• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button is
unlocked and door opens.
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
key is in the ignition switch and any
front door is open.
• Doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.

OMD040011

• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The red mark (2) on the door
lock button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.

4 16
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

✽ NOTICE
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehicle
try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
Lower a front window and use the
mechanical key to unlock the door
from outside.

Features of your vehicle

With the central door lock switch
(if equipped)
■ Driver’s door

■ Passenger’s door

OMD040012A

• If the key is in the ignition switch
and any door is opened, the doors
will not lock even though the lock
button (1) of the central door lock
switch is pressed.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle and
any door is opened, the doors will
not lock even though the lock button
(1) of the central door lock switch is
pressed.
When pressing the ( ) portion (2) of
the switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.

OMD040192N

WARNING
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion. If the
doors are unlocked, the risk of
being thrown from the vehicle in
a crash is increased.

WARNING
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
serious injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Children
might operate features of the
vehicle that could injure them,
or they could encounter other
harm, possibly from someone
gaining entry to the vehicle.

When pressing the ( ) portion (1) of
the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

4 17
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Always
secure your vehicle
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
increases the potential risk to
you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle.
To secure your vehicle, while
depressing the brake, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position (for automatic transaxle) or
first gear or R (Reverse, for
manual transaxle), engage the
parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position, close all windows,
lock all doors, and always take
the key with you.

WARNING
Opening a door when something
is approaching may cause damage or injury. Be careful when
opening doors and watch for
vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles
or pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.

4 18
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Auto door lock/unlock features
Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped)
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when an impact causes the
air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will be automatically locked
when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph
(15 km/h).

Features of your vehicle

Child-safety rear door locks

To utilize the child safety lock, insert a
key (or screwdriver) into the hole (1)
and turn it to the lock ( ) position.
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock the
child safety lock.

WARNING

OMD044007

The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors. The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock is located on
the edge of each rear door. When the
child safety lock is in the lock position
( ), the rear door will not open if
the inner door handle is pulled.

If children accidently open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out of the
vehicle.The rear door safety locks
should always be used whenever
children are in the vehicle.

4 19
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
This system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables. The horn will
sound and the hazard warning lights
will blink continuously if any of the
following occurs:
- A door is opened without using the
remote key or smart key.
- The trunk is opened without using
the remote key or smart key.
- The engine hood is opened.
The alarm continues for 30 seconds,
then the system resets. To turn off
the alarm, unlock the doors with the
remote key or smart key.
The Theft Alarm System automatically sets 30 seconds after you lock
the doors and the trunk. For the system to activate, you must lock the
doors and the trunk from outside the
vehicle with the remote key or smart
key or by pressing the button on the
outside of the door handles with the
smart key in your possession.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once to
indicate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set, opening any door, the trunk, or the hood
without using the remote key or smart
key will cause the alarm to activate.
The Theft Alarm System will not set if
the hood, the trunk, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the hood, the trunk, or the
doors are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it.

4 20
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

✽ NOTICE
• Do not lock the doors until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the
remaining passenger leaves the
vehicle when the system is armed,
the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with
the remote key or smart key, open
the doors by using the mechanical
key and place the ignition switch in
the ON position (for remote key)
or start the engine (for smart key)
by directly pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button with the smart
key.
• When the system is disarmed but a
door or trunk is not opened within
30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.

Features of your vehicle
TRUNK
Opening the trunk

Closing the trunk

■ Inside

1. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park, for automatic transaxle) or first
gear or R (Reverse, for manual
transaxle) and set the parking brake.
2. Perform one of the following:

Lower the trunk lid and press down
until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid
is securely fastened, always check
by trying to pull it up again.

✽ NOTICE

■ Outside

OMD040014

In cold and wet climates, trunk locks
and trunk mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing conditions.

- Use the trunk release lever.

WARNING
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
trunk.

OMD040013A

- Press the remote key or smart
key Trunk Unlock button for more
than one second.
- Press the button on the trunk
itself with the smart key in your
possession.
- Press the button on the trunk
itself when all doors are unlocked.
- Use the mechanical key.
4 21
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
trunk before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur
to the trunk lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the trunk is
not closed prior to driving.

WARNING

Emergency trunk safety
release

The trunk lid should be always
kept completely closed while
the vehicle is in motion. If it is
left open or ajar, poisonous
exhaust gases may enter the
vehicle and serious illness or
death may result.

OMD040015

Your vehicle is equipped with an
Emergency Trunk Safety Release
lever located inside the trunk. When
someone is inadvertently locked in
the trunk, the trunk can be opened by
moving the lever in the direction of the
arrow and pushing the trunk open.

4 22
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

WARNING
• You and your passengers
must be aware of the location
of the Emergency Trunk
Safety Release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the
trunk in case you are accidentally locked in the trunk.
• NEVER allow anyone to occupy the trunk of the vehicle at
any time. If the trunk is partially or totally latched and the person is unable to get out, serious injury or death could occur
due to lack of ventilation,
exhaust fumes and rapid heat
build-up, or because of exposure to cold weather conditions. The trunk is also a highly
dangerous location in the
event of a crash because it is
not a protected occupant
space but is a part of the vehicle’s crush zone.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and the key should be
kept out of the reach of children. Parents should teach
their children about the dangers of playing in the trunk.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only.

4 23
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
Power windows

(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window*
(7) Power window lock switch
* : if equipped

OMD040016N

4 24
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to be able to raise or lower
the windows. Each door has a Power
Window switch to control that door's
window. The driver has a Power
Window Lock switch which can block
the operation of passenger windows.
The power windows will operate for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or LOCK/OFF position. However, if
the front doors are opened, the
Power Windows cannot be operated
even within the 30 second period.

✽ NOTICE

Window opening and closing

• In cold and wet climates, power
windows may not work properly
due to freezing conditions.
• While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) opened (or partially
opened), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is normal and can
be reduced or eliminated by taking
the following actions. If the noise
occurs with one or both of the rear
windows down, partially lower
both front windows approximately
one inch. If you experience the
noise with the sunroof open, slightly close the sunroof.

To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).

OMD040017

4 25
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

OMD040019

OMD040018

Auto down window (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is
in operation, pull up or press down
and release the switch.

Auto up/down window (if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.

4 26
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

To reset the power windows
If the power windows do not operate
normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least one second.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Power window lock switch

The automatic reverse feature is
only active when the “auto up” feature is used by fully pulling up the
switch to the second detent.

WARNING

OUN026013

Automatic reversal (if equipped)
If a window senses any obstacle while
it is closing automatically, it will stop
and lower approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) to allow the object to be
cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window will
stop upward movement then lower
approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window reversal
will not operate.

• Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the
way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
• Objects less than 0.16 inch
(4 mm) in diameter caught
between the window glass
and the upper window channel may not be detected by
the automatic reverse window
and the window will not stop
and reverse direction.

OMD040020N

The driver can disable the power
window switches on the passengers’
doors by pressing the power window
lock switch.
• The driver’s control can operate
the driver’s power window.
• The front passenger’s control cannot operate the front passenger’s
power window.
• The rear passenger’s control cannot operate the rear passenger’s
power window.

4 27
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage
to the power window system,
do not open or close two windows or more at the same
time. This will also ensure the
longevity of the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door
and the individual door window switch in opposite directions at the same time. If this is
done, the window will stop and
cannot be opened or closed.

WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the engine is
running.
• NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even
very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to
move, entangle themselves in
the windows, or otherwise
injure themselves or others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head
and other obstructions are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK position (pressed). Serious injury
can result from unintentional
window operation by the child.
• Do not extend your head,
arms or body outside the windows while driving.

4 28
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
HOOD
Opening the hood

OMD041204L
OMD044022
OMD040021

1. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park, for automatic transaxle) or
first gear or R (Reverse, for manual
transaxle) and set the parking
brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.

3. Raise the hood slightly, pull the
secondary latch up (1) inside of
the hood center until it releases
the hood and lift the hood (2).

OMD040023

4. Pull out the support rod (3).
5. Hold the hood opened with the
support rod (4).

4 29
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Support rod
• Grasp the support rod in the
area wrapped in rubber. The
rubber will help prevent you
from being burned by hot
metal when the engine is hot.
• The support rod must be
inserted completely into the
hole provided whenever you
inspect the engine compartment. This will prevent the
hood from falling and possibly injuring you.

Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
Then double check to be sure the
hood is secure.

4 30
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING
• Before closing the hood,
ensure that all obstructions
are removed from the hood
opening.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
it is not latched, the hood
could open while the vehicle
is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed,
which might result in an accident, and the hood could fall
or be damaged.

Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER DOOR
✽ NOTICE

Opening the fuel filler door

If the fuel filler door does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the door to
break the ice and release the door.
Do not pry on the door. If necessary,
spray around the door with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use
radiator anti-freeze) or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
OMD044025
OMD040024

The fuel filler door must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
the fuel filler door opener.
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Pull the fuel filler door opener up
located on the floor, left side of the
driver’s seat.

3. Pull the fuel filler door out (1) to
fully open.
4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pressure inside the tank equalizes.
5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.

Closing the fuel filler door
1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it “clicks” one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.

4 31
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate the
potential build-up of static
electricity by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
and cause a fire.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling. You can generate a buildup of static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against
any item or fabric capable of
producing static electricity.
Static electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors causing a
fire. If you must re-enter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge
by touching a metal part of the
vehicle, away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)

4 32
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
sure to place the container on
the ground prior to refueling.
Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun,
contact between your bare
hand and the vehicle should
be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)
• When refueling, always move
the shift lever to the P (Park)
position
(for
automatic
transaxle) or first gear or R
(Reverse, for manual transaxle),
set the parking brake, and place
the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position. Sparks
produced by electrical components related to the engine can
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station,
especially during refueling.
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before completely removing the cap.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.

✽ NOTICE
• Make sure to refuel your
vehicle according to the "Fuel
Requirements" suggested in chapter 1.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of
fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.

CAUTION
If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.

4 33
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
Sunroof opening and closing

OMDC043026

The ignition switch must be in the ON
position before you can open or
close the sunroof.

OMDC043027

To open:
Press the sunroof control lever backward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.
To close:
Press the sunroof control lever backward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.

4 34
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING
Make sure heads, other body
parts or other objects are safely
out of the way before closing
the windows to avoid injuries or
vehicle damage.
Objects less than 0.16inch (4mm)
in diameter caught between the
sunroof glass and the front window channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse window and the window will not stop
and reverse direction.

Features of your vehicle

Sliding the sunroof

Automatic reversal

Tilting the sunroof

Pressing the sunroof control lever
backward or forward momentarily to
the second detent position completely opens or closes the sunroof even
when the switch is released. To stop
the sunroof at the desired position
while the sunroof is in operation,
press the sunroof control lever backward or forward and release the
switch.

✽ NOTICE
To reduce wind noise while driving, it
is recommended that you drive with
the sunroof slightly closed (stop the
sunroof about 2 inches (5 cm) before
the maximum slide open position).

OBK049018

OMDC043028

If the sunroof senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction then stop to allow
the object to be cleared.

Tilt the sunroof open:
Push the sunroof control lever
upward until the sunroof moves to
the desired position.
To close the sunroof:
Pull the sunroof lever downward until
the sunroof moves to the desired
position.

4 35
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

WARNING
• Make sure heads, other body
parts or other objects are
safely out of the way before
closing the sunroof to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage.
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
• To avoid serious injury or
death, do not extend your
head, arms or body outside
the sunroof while driving.

CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt
that may accumulate on the
sunroof guide rail or between
the sunroof and roof panel,
which can make a noise.
• Do not try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
motor could be damaged.
• To prevent damage to the sunroof and the motor, do not
continue to press the sunroof
control lever after the sunroof
is in the fully open, closed or
tilt position(s).

✽ NOTICE
After washing the vehicle or after a
rain, be sure to wipe off the water on
the sunroof before operating the
sunroof.

4 36
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Sunshade

OBK049019

The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof when the glass
panel moves. If you want it closed,
move the sunshade manually.

CAUTION
The sunroof is made to slide
together with the sunshade. Do
not leave the sunshade closed
while the sunroof is open.

Features of your vehicle

To reset the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the
followings)
- Battery is discharged or disconnected or the related fuse has been
replaced or disconnected
- The one-touch sliding function of
the sunroof does not normally operate
1. The ignition switch must be in the
ON position.
2. Close the sunroof completely.
3. Release the control lever.
4. Push the control lever forward until
the sunroof tilts and slightly moves
up and down. Then, release the
lever.
5. Push the control lever forward until
the sunroof is operated as follows:

If the sunroof does not operate properly after resetting, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

TILT OPEN → SLIDE OPEN →
SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.

4 37
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering (EPS)
The system assists you with steering
the vehicle. If the engine is off or if
the power steering system becomes
inoperative, the vehicle may still be
steered, but it will require increased
steering effort.
Also, the steering effort becomes
heavier as the vehicle’s speed
increases and becomes lighter as
the vehicle’s speed decreases for
better control of the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION
If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally, the warning light ( ) will
illuminate on the instrument
cluster. The steering wheel may
become difficult to control or
operate. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked as
soon as possible.

4 38
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

✽ NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort may be high
immediately after placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics.
When the diagnostics is completed, the steering wheel will return
to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is placed to the ON or
LOCK/OFF position.
• A motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at stop or at a low
driving speed.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear.
This is a normal condition.

Features of your vehicle

Tilt steering / Telescope steering

After adjusting, pull up the lockrelease lever (1) to lock the steering
wheel in place. Push the steering
wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position. Always
adjust the position of the steering
wheel before driving.

Driver selectable steering
mode (if equipped)

WARNING

OMD040029

Never adjust the steering wheel
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control resulting
in an accident.
OMD044608

Pull down the lock-release lever (1) on
the steering wheel column and adjust
the steering wheel angle (2) and position (3, if equipped). Move the steering wheel, so it points toward your
chest, not toward your face. Make
sure you can see the instrument
panel warning lights and gauges.

The Driver Selectable Steering Mode
controls steering effort as driver's
preference or road condition.You can
select the desired steering mode by
pressing the steering mode button.
The driver selectable steering mode
stays in the last mode selected when
turning the engine on.

4 39
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

NORMAL mode

SPORT mode

OMD044723

When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode
will appear on the cluster.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode
will change as above pictures.
If the steering wheel mode button is
not pressed for about 4 seconds, the
cluster will change to the previous
screen.

OMD044722
OMD044721

The NORMAL mode offers medium
steering effort.

4 40
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

The steering effort becomes heavier.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

COMFORT mode

Horn

For your safety, if you press the
steering mode button to change the
mode while turning the steering
wheel, the cluster will change as you
have selected, but the steering effort
will not change. The steering effort
will change to the selected mode,
when the steering wheel is positioned to the center.
OMD044720

The steering effort comes lighter in
COMFORT mode.

CAUTION
• Be careful when changing the
steering mode while driving.
• When the Electric Power
Steering is not working properly, the Driver Selectable
Steering Mode will not work.

OMD040030

To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.

CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely
to operate it, or hit it with your
fist. Do not press on the horn
with a sharp-pointed object.

4 41
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Before you start driving, adjust the
rearview mirror to the center on the
view through the rear window.

WARNING
Make sure your line of sight is not
obstructed. Do not place objects
in the rear seat, cargo area, or
behind the rear headrests which
could interfere with your vision
through the rear window.

Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)

Blue Link® center (if equipped)

Night

Day

WARNING
To prevent serious injury during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag, do not modify the
rearview mirror and do not
install a wide mirror.

WARNING
NEVER adjust the mirror while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.

OMD044712N
OMD040031

Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.

4 42
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

For details, refer to the Blue Link®
Owner’s Guide, Navigation Manual
or Audio Manual. The Audio Manual
is in this chapter.

Features of your vehicle

Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with compass and HomeLink®
system (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
and an Integrated HomeLink®
Wireless Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature
will automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare. The HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror (if equipped)

CAUTION

OMD044713N

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

Channel 1 button
Channel 2 button
Status indicator LED
Channel 3 button
Rear light sensor
Dimming ON button
Dimming OFF button

The NVS® Mirror automatically
reduces glare by monitoring
light levels in the front and the
rear of the vehicle. Any object
that obstructs either light sensor will degrade the automatic
dimming control feature.
For more information regarding
NVS® mirrors and other applications,
please refer to the Gentex website:
www.gentex.com

4 43
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

The auto-dimming function can be
controlled by pressing the ON/OFF
button:
1. Pressing the OFF button (7) turns
the auto-dimming function off
which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing the ON button (6) again
turns the auto-dimming function
on which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON position each time the vehicle is started.

Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink® Wireless Control
System can replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This innovative feature will
learn the radio frequency codes of
most current transmitters to operate
devices such as gate operators,
garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems, even home
lighting. Both standard and rolling
code-equipped transmitters can be
programmed by following the outlined procedures.
Additional HomeLink® information
can be found at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink® programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® buttons be erased for
security purposes.

4 44
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING
Before
programming
HomeLink® to a garage door
opener or gate operator, make
sure people and objects are out
of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink® with
any garage door opener that
lacks the safety stop and
reverse features required by
U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door
opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage
door that cannot detect an
object - signaling the door to
stop and reverse - does not
meet current U.S. federal safety
standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features
increases the risk of serious
injury or death.

Features of your vehicle

Programming HomeLink®
Please note the following:
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the
vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker
training and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be placed in the
ACC (or "Accessories") position for
programming and/or operation of
HomeLink®.
• In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Rolling code programming
Rolling code devices which are
"code-protected" and manufactured
after 1996 may be determined by the
following:
• Reference the device owner's
manual for verification.
• The handheld transmitter appears
to program the HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver but does not
activate the device.
• Press and hold the trained
HomeLink button. The device has
the rolling code feature if the indicator light flashes rapidly and then
turns solid after 2 seconds.

To train rolling code devices, follow
these instructions:
1. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door
opener brand. If there is difficulty
locating the training button, reference the device owner's manual or
please visit our Web site at
www.homelink.com.
2. Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button (which
activates the "training light"). You
will have 30 seconds to initiate
step 3.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for two seconds and
then
release
the
desired
HomeLink® button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time to complete the programming. (Some devices may
require you to repeat this
sequence a third time to complete
the programming.)
4 45

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

4. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink® button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate.
5. To program the remaining two
HomeLink® buttons, follow either
steps 1 through 4 above for other
Rolling Code devices or steps 2
through 5 in Standard Programming
for standard devices.

Standard programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons,
HomeLink® Channel 1 and
Channel 3 Buttons, until the indicator light begins to flash (after 20
seconds). Release both buttons.
Do not hold the buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® buttons
while keeping the indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink® and handheld transmitter button. DO NOT
release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4. While continuing to hold the buttons the red Indicator Status LED
will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink® successfully
trains to the frequency signal from
the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons.

4 46
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink® button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate when
the HomeLink® button is pressed
and released.
6. To program the remaining two
HomeLink® buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.

Features of your vehicle

Gate operator & Canadian programming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System button (note
steps 2 through 4 in the Standard
Programming portion of this document) while you press and re-press
("cycle") your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
Operating HomeLink®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink® button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button
To program a new device to a previously trained HomeLink® button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink® button. Do NOT
release until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the handheld transmitter 1
to 3 inches away from the
HomeLink® surface.
3. Press and hold the handheld
transmitter button. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink® button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your new device should activate.

Erasing HomeLink® buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three programmed buttons:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash-after 20
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be programmed at any time following the
appropriate
steps
in
the
Programming chapters above.

4 47
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

WARNING
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the device.

Outside rearview mirror
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors.

WARNING - Rearview
mirrors
• The right outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in
the mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview
mirror or turn your head and
look to determine the actual
distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.

4 48
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while driving.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.

CAUTION
• Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the
surface of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by
force. Use an approved spray
de-icer (not radiator antifreeze)
spray, or a sponge or soft cloth
with very warm water, or move
the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.

Features of your vehicle

Blind zone mirror

WARNING

OGD044714

Remote control

• Always check the road condition while driving for unexpected situations even though
the vehicle is equipped with a
blind zone mirror.
• The blind zone mirror is a
device made for convenience.
Do not solely rely on the mirror but always pay attention to
drive safely.
OMD040035N

CAUTION
Do not clean the mirror with
harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum based cleaning products.

OGD054050

The Blind Zone Mirror (BZM) is a
supplemental mirror that reduces the
driver's blind zone by showing the
rear side area of the vehicle. The
blind zone mirror is equipped on the
left-hand outside rearview mirror.

Electric type
Move the lever (1) to the L (Left) or R
(Right) to select the rearview mirror
you would like to adjust.
Use the mirror adjustment control to
position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
After adjustment, place the lever (1)
in the center to prevent inadvertent
adjustment.

4 49
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION

Folding the outside rearview mirror

• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand or the motor may be
damaged.

2–

To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.

4 50
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. Odometer/Trip computer
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.

OMD044040N

4 51
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Fuse switch ON

Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination

OMD044605

OMD040043

When the vehicle's parking lights or
headlights are on, press the illumination control button to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
illumination.

• The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.

4 52
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

OMD044604

This warning message illuminates if
the fuse switch under the steering
wheel is OFF.
Turn the fuse switch ON.
For more details, refer to "Fuses" in
chapter 7.

Features of your vehicle

Tachometer

Gauges

CAUTION

Speedometer

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.

OMD040046N
OMD040044N

The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).

The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

4 53
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge

CAUTION

Fuel Gauge

If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “H” position, it indicates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to “If the
Engine Overheats” in chapter 6.
OMD044049N
OMD044048N

This gauge shows the temperature
of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure
and could cause severe burns.
Wait until the engine is cool
before adding coolant to the
reservoir.

4 54
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.

WARNING - Fuel Gauge

Odometer

Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the “E (Empty)”
level.

CAUTION
Avoid driving with a very low
fuel level. Running out of fuel
could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter.

OMD044053N

The odometer indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles
or kilometers.

4 55
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Transaxle Shift Indicator

Trip computer

Automatic Transaxle Shift
Indicator (if equipped)

Overview

Press the TRIP button for less than 1
second to select any mode as follows :
TRIP A
TRIP B
Distance to empty
Average fuel economy

OMD044052N
OMD044603

This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.
•
•
•
•
•

Park : P
Reverse : R
Neutral : N
Drive : D
Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Description
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related
to driving.

✽ NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.

4 56
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Average speed
Elapsed time
ECO ON/OFF*
* : if equipped

Features of your vehicle

OMD044057K

OMD044059N

OMD044065N

Tripmeter (mi. or km)
TRIP A : Tripmeter A
TRIP B : Tripmeter B
This mode indicates the distance of
individual trips selected since the
last tripmeter reset.
The meter's working range is from
0.0 to 999.9 miles (0.0 to 999.9 km).
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the tripmeter
(TRIP A or TRIP B) is being displayed, clears the tripmeter to zero
(0.0).

Distance to empty (mi. or km)
This mode indicates the estimated
distance to empty based on the current fuel in the fuel tank and the
amount of fuel delivered to the
engine. When the remaining distance
is below 30 miles (50 km), “---” will be
displayed and the distance to empty
indicator will blink.
The meter’s working range is from 30
to 999 miles (50 to 999 km).

Average fuel economy (if equipped)
(MPG or l/100 km)
This mode calculates the average
fuel consumption from the total fuel
used and the distance since the last
average economy reset. The total
fuel used is calculated from the fuel
consumption input. For an accurate
calculation, drive more than 0.03
miles (50 m).
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the average fuel
economy is being displayed, clears
the average fuel consumption to zero
(----).

4 57
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.6
MPH (1km/h) after being refueled
with more than 1.6 gallons (6 l), the
average fuel economy will be cleared
to zero (----).

OMD044071N

OMD044074N

Average speed (MPH or km/h)
This mode calculates the average
speed of the vehicle since the last
average speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average speed keeps changing
while the engine is running.
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the average
speed is being displayed, clears the
average speed to zero (---).

Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time
traveled since the last driving time
reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the driving time keeps increasing
while the engine is running.
The meter’s working range is from
00:00~99:59.
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the elapsed
time is being displayed, clears the
elapsed time to zero (00:00).

4 58
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the “Distance to
empty” function may not operate
correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel are added to
the vehicle.
• The fuel consumption and distance to empty values may vary
significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an
estimate of the available driving
distance. This value may differ
from the actual driving distance
available.

ECO ON/OFF mode (if equipped)

OMD044702

You can turn the Manual transaxle
shift indicator ON/OFF on the instrument cluster in this mode.
If you push the RESET button for
more than 1 second in the ECO ON
mode, ECO OFF is displayed on the
screen and the Manual transaxle
shift indicator turns off while driving.
If you want to display the Manual
transaxle shift indicator again, press
the RESET button for more than 1
second in the ECO OFF mode and
then ECO ON mode is displayed in
the screen.

Manual Transaxle Shift
Indicator (if equipped)
This indicator informs you which
gear is desired while driving to save
fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd
gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th
gear).

4 59
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Warning and indicator lights

✽ NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.

Air bag Warning Light

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.

4 60
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level is
low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (For more details,
refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).

Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leak on the
brake system is found, the warning
light remains on, or the brakes do
not operate properly, do not drive
the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING - Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

4 61
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.

4 62
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brake

force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Features of your vehicle

Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Warning Light
(if equipped)

Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.

CAUTION - Gasoline
Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.

4 63
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.

If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

4 64
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the engine coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C). This
means that the engine is overheated and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to “Overheating” in chapter 6.

CAUTION - Engine
Overheating
Do not continue driving with the
engine overheated. Otherwise
engine may be damaged.

Features of your vehicle

Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 7).
If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not available, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Engine Oil
Pressure
Warning Light
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Light is
illuminated, severe damage
could result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be
serious engine damage or
malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and
check the oil level. If the oil
level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after
the engine is started, turn
the engine off immediately.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Low Fuel Level Warning
Light

This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty, add
fuel as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below "E (Empty)" can
cause the engine to misfire and
damage the catalytic converter
(if equipped).

4 65
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.

This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.

WARNING - Low tire
pressure
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
• Continued driving or low pressure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.

WARNING - Safe Stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.

4 66
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Door Ajar Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.

Trunk Open Warning
Light

This warning light illuminates:
When the trunk is not closed securely.

Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.

Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

4 67
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

ECO Indicator Light
(if equipped)

ECO

This indicator light illuminates:
When you activate the active ECO
system by pressing the ACTIVE
ECO button.
For more details, refer to “Active
ECO System” in chapter 5.

Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
(if equipped)

Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:
When the vehicle detects the immobilizer in your key properly while the
ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.

This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
When the vehicle detects the smart
key in the vehicle properly while the
Engine Start/Stop Button is ACC or
ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks:
When there is a malfunction with the
immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected
by
an
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

4 68
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.

Features of your vehicle

This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
When the vehicle can not detect the
smart key which is in the vehicle
while the Engine Start/Stop Button is
ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected
by
an
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in section 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn Signal Indicator
Light

This indicator light blinks:
When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illuminate at all.

4 69
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

High Beam Indicator
Light

This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator Light

Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)

CRUISE

This indicator light illuminates:
When the parking lights or headlights are on.

This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.

Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)

For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.

This indicator light illuminates:
When the front fog lights are on.

Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)

SET

This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.

4 70
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
KEY OUT Indicator Light
(if equipped)

KEY
OUT

WARNING

When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC or ON position,
if any door is open, the system
checks for the smart key.
OMD044091

This indicator light blinks:
When the smart key is not in the
vehicle and any door is open with the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button in the ACC or ON position.
- At this time, if you close all doors,
the chime will also sound for
approximately 5 seconds.
- The indicator will go off while the
vehicle is moving.

• This system is a supplementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the inside/outside rearview mirror and the
area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered
with foreign matter, the camera may not operate normally.

OMD045092

The rearview camera will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
engine start/stop button ON and the
shift lever in the R position.
This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle
through the monitor while backingup.
4 71
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
LIGHT
■ Type A
(1) DRL OFF (OFF) position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) AUTO light position (if equipped)

Exterior lights
Lighting control
■ Type A

OYFH041900N
■ Type B

■ Type B
(1) OFF position
(2) DRL ON position
(3) Parking light position
(4) Headlight position

Parking light position (

)

■ Type A

OYFH041901N
■ Type B

OGD044903N
OGD044900N

When the light switch is in the parking light position (1st position), the
parking lights, taillights, license plate
lights and instrument panel lights are
turned ON.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:

4 72
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Headlight position (

✽ NOTICE

)

AUTO light position (if equipped)

The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.

■ Type A

OYFH041902N
■ Type B

OYFH041906N

When the light switch is in the AUTO
position, the parking (position) light
and headlights will be turned ON or
OFF automatically depending on the
amount of light outside the vehicle.
Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lights when
driving at night or in a fog, or when
you enter dark areas, such as tunnels and parking facilities.

OGD044907N

When the light switch is in the head
light position (2nd position), the
headlights, parking lights, taillights,
license plate lights and instrument
panel lights are turned ON.

4 73
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION
• Do not cover or spill anything
on the sensor (1) located on
the instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using
a window cleaner, the cleanser
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor
operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield,
the AUTO light system may
not work properly.

High beam operation

To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.

■ Type A

WARNING

OYFH041904N
■ Type B

OGD044901N

To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.

4 74
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles approaching
you. Using high beam could
obstruct the other driver's vision.

Features of your vehicle

Turn signals and lane change signals

■ Type A

To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.

OYFH041903N
■ Type B

OYFH041907N
■ Type B

OGD044904N

To flash the high beam headlights,
pull the lever towards you, then
release the lever. The high beams
will remain ON as long as you hold
the lever towards you.

OGD044906N

To signal a turn, move the lever up
for a right turn or down for a left turn
to position (A). The lever will return to
the OFF position when the turn is
completed.

4 75
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

One-touch lane change function
To activate an one-touch lane
change function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3
times.

Front fog light (if equipped)
■ Type A

✽ NOTICE
If the turn signal indicator stays on
and does not flash, or if it flashes
abnormally, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit. The bulb may
require replacement.

OYFH041905N
■ Type B

OGD044905N

Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. Use
the switch next to the headlight switch
to turn the fog lights ON and OFF. The
fog lights will turn on when fog light
switch (1) is turned to ON after the
parking lights are turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the
switch to the OFF position.
4 76
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
When the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, you can also use the
fog lights when the headlights turn
on automatically. The fog lights will
go OFF when the headlights turn
OFF.

CAUTION
When in operation, the fog
lights consume large amounts
of vehicle electrical power. Only
use the fog lights when visibility
is poor.

Features of your vehicle

Battery saver function
The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key or
turns the engine off (for smart key)
and opens the driver-side door.
With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed or
the engine is turned off (for smart
key), perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch on
the steering column.

Headlight escort function
If the key is removed from the ignition
switch or placed in the ACC position
or the LOCK/OFF position with the
headlights ON, the headlights (and/or
parking lights) remain on for about 5
minutes. However, if the driver’s door
is opened and closed, the headlights
are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the LOCK button on the
remote key or smart key twice or
turning the light switch to the OFF or
AUTO position. However, if you turn
the light switch to the AUTO position
when it is dark outside, the headlights will not be turned off.

CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except
driver's door), the battery saver
function does not operate and
the headlamp delay function
does not turn off automatically.
Therefore, It causes the battery
to be discharged. In this case,
make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.

4 77
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Daytime running light (DRL)
(if equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before
sunset.
Type A
The DRL will turn off when:
1. The headlight is ON.
2. The light switch is in the DRL OFF
position.
3. The parking brake is applied.
4. The engine is turned OFF.

Interior lights

CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the
engine is turned off or the battery will discharge.

WARNING
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark. The
interior lights may obscure your
view and cause an accident.

Type B
The DRL will turn off when:
1. The headlight is ON.
2. The light switch is in the OFF position.
3. The parking brake is applied.
4. The engine is turned OFF.

4 78
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
When all doors are closed, if you lock
the vehicle by using the remote key
or smart key, all interior lamp will be
off within 5 seconds.
If you do not operate anything in the
vehicle after turning off the engine,
the lights will turn off after 20 minutes.

Features of your vehicle

Front lamps

Front Map Lamp:
Press either the right or left lens to
turn the map lamp on or off. This light
produces a spot beam for convenient
use as a map lamp at night or as a
personal lamp for the driver and the
front passenger.

OMD040096

(1) Front Map Lamp
(2) Front Room Lamp

Front Room Lamp:
The Front Room Lamp Switch activates the front and rear room lamps
when the switch is pressed in either of
the three positions indicated below:
DOOR :
With the switch in this position, the
front and rear room lamps come on
when the front or rear doors are
opened, or when the doors are
unlocked by the remote key or smart
key.
Once all doors are closed, the room
lamps will go out gradually after
about 30 seconds.
If a door is open with the ignition
switch in the ACC position or the
LOCK/OFF position, the lamps will
remain on for about 20 minutes. If a
door is open with the ignition switch
in the ON position, the lamps will
stay on continuously.

ON :
With the Front Room Lamp in this
position, the front and rear room
lamps remain on at all times.
OFF :
With the Front Room Lamp in this
position the front and rear room
lamps remain off at all times.

✽ NOTICE
When the map lamp (1) is turned
ON by pressing the lens, the map
lamp will not turn off even if the
front room lamp switch is in the
OFF position.

4 79
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Rear lamp

Trunk lamp

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

OMD040097

OMD040160

OYF049209

Rear Room Lamp Switch:
Press this switch to turn the room
lamp on and off.

The trunk lamp comes on when the
trunk is opened.

Push the switch to turn the light ON
or OFF.
•
: The lamp will turn ON.
• O : The lamp will turn OFF.

CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not leave the lamp switches
on for an extended period of time
when the engine is turned off.

The trunk lamp comes on as
long as the trunk lid is open. To
prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the trunk lid
securely after using the trunk.

4 80
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, turn off the
lamp by pushing the O button
after using the lamp.

Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
✽ NOTICE

Windshield wipers

If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.

OYF049100

A : Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent or Auto control
wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes
(if equipped)

OYF049102

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
MIST : For a single wipe push the
lever upward and release. The
wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this
position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation.
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. To
vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
LO : The wiper runs at a lower speed.
HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.
4 81
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever. If
the washer does not work, you may
need to add washer fluid to the
washer fluid reservoir.

Windshield washers

WARNING

OYF049101

In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles. Use this function
when the windshield is dirty.

When the outside temperature
is below freezing, ALWAYS
warm the windshield using the
defroster to prevent the washer
fluid from freezing on the windshield and obscuring your
vision which could result in an
accident and serious injury or
death.

4 82
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage
to the washer pump, do not
operate the washer when the
fluid reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.

Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.

Rear window defroster
■ Type A

✽ NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front
windshield,
refer
to
“Windshield defrosting and defogging” in this chapter.

OMD044098
■ Type B

OMD044099

The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.

To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster button again.

Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time
you turn on the rear window
defroster.

4 83
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Front windshield defrost button
2. Mode selection buttons
3. Rear window defroster button
4. A/C (Air conditioning) button (if equipped)
5. Air intake control button
6. Fan speed control knob
7. Temperature control knob

OMD044100

4 84
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.

OMD044102

4 85
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Mode selection
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)
OMD044101

The mode selection knob controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and
Defrost air position.

Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield, side
window defrosters, and side vents.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters, and side vents.

Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side vents.

4 86
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)

Temperature control

OMD044104
OMD044103

The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster. Air
flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.

Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.

OMD044105

The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the air temperature
inside the vehicle, turn the knob to
the right for warm air or left for cooler air.

4 87
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Air intake control

OMD044106

This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when
the recirculated air position is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger compartment will be drawn
through the climate control system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.

4 88
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment to become
stale.
In addition, prolonged operation of
the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result
in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

Features of your vehicle

WARNING
• Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continue using the climate
control system in the recirculated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness,
and loss of vehicle control.
Set the air intake control to
the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while
driving.

Fan speed control

To turn off the fan

OMD044107

OMD044703

The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.

To turn off the fan, turn the fan speed
control knob to the "0" position.

4 89
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning

System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.

OMD044108

Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning system off.

Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
,
position.

4 90
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Operation Tips
• To prevent dust or unpleasant
fumes from entering the vehicle
through the ventilation system,
temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position.
Be sure to return the control to the
fresh air position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.

Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation of the recirculated air position will excessively
dry the air. In this case, change the
air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.

✽ NOTICE
• While using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic
when outside temperatures are
high. Air conditioning system
operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the engine temperature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
• Opening the windows in humid
weather while air conditioning
operates may create water
droplets inside the vehicle. Since
excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only
be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

4 91
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode
may cause the air inside the vehicle
to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid
air intake. This is a normal system
operation characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner
excessively, the difference between
the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could
cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button to
the
position and fan speed
control to the lower speed.

Climate control air filter
Outside air
Recirculated
air

Blower
Climate control
air filter

Heater core
Evaporator
core
OMG075033

The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

4 92
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

✽ NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty,
rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections
and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Features of your vehicle

Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING
Because the refrigerant is at very high
pressure, the air conditioning
system
should only be serviced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.

CAUTION - Compressor
damage
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used. Otherwise,
damage to the compressor and
abnormal system operation may
occur.

The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
■ Example

OMD043301N

❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.

Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubricant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of air conditioning refrigerant
label.
4 93

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Driver’s temperature control button
2. Front windshield defrost button
3. Air intake control button
4. LCD display
5. AUTO (automatic control) button
6. OFF button
7. Fan speed control knob
8. Mode selection button
9. Dual temperature control selection button
10. Passenger’s temperature control button
11. Rear window defrost button
12. A/C (Air conditioning) button

OMD044109

4 94
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air conditioning

OMD044110

1. Push the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by temperature setting.

■ Driver

■ Front passenger

OMD044116

OMD040111

2. Press the temperature control button to set the desired temperature.

✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

✽ NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defrost button
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
73°F (23°C).

4 95
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Manual heating and air conditioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.

Mode selection
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level

OMD044112

The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:

Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.

Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.

Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor & Defrost
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.

4 96
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Temperature control
■ Driver

OMD044113

OMD044104

Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.

■ Front passenger

OMD044116

The temperature will increase by
pushing the up button. Each push of
the button will cause the temperature
to increase by 1°F/0.5°C.
The temperature will decrease by
pushing the down button. Each push
of the button will cause the temperature to decrease by 1°F/0.5°C. When
set to the lowest temperature setting,
the air conditioning will operate continuously.

4 97
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

When the driver side temperature is
set to the highest or lowest temperature setting, the DUAL mode is deactivated for maximum heating or cooling.

Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to
deactivate DUAL mode. The passenger side temperature will be
set to the same temperature as
the driver side temperature.
2. Press the left temperature control
button. The driver and passenger
side temperature will be adjusted
equally.

OMD044115

Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate
the driver and passenger side
temperature individually. Pressing
the right temperature control button will automatically switch to the
DUAL mode as well.
2. Press the left temperature control
button to adjust the driver side
temperature. Press the right temperature control button to adjust
the passenger side temperature.

Temperature unit conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
This is a normal condition. You can
switch the temperature mode
between Fahrenheit to Celsius as follows;
While pressing the OFF button,
depress the AUTO button for 3 seconds or more. The display will
change from Fahrenheit to Celsius,
or from Celsius to Fahrenheit.

4 98
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Air intake control

OMD044117

This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment to become
stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.

Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button will not illuminate
when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected.
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.

4 99
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

WARNING
• Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continue using the climate
control system in the recirculated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.

Fan speed control

Air conditioning

OMD044114

OMD044118

The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by turning the fan
speed control knob.
The higher the fan speed is, the
more air is delivered.

Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.

4 100
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn off the
air climate control system. However,
you can still operate the mode and
air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.

4 101
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

4 102
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner
excessively,
the
difference
between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
or button to the
position and
fan speed control to the lower
speed.

Climate control air filter
Outside air
Recirculated
air

Blower
Climate control
air filter

Heater core
Evaporator
core
OMG075033

4 103
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION - Compressor
damage
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used. Otherwise,
damage to the compressor and
abnormal system operation may
occur.

The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
■ Example

OMD043301N

❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.

|Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubricant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of air conditioning refrigerant
label.

4 104
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the
or
position during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the
position and fan
speed control knob or button to
a lower speed.

• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
✽ NOTE
Be sure to keep the interior surface
of the windshield clean by wiping it
with a clean cloth and glass cleaner.
This will help reduce the tendency of
the glass fogging and also improve
visibility.

Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield

OMD044120

1. Select any fan speed except “0”
position.
2. Select desired temperature, except
MAX A/C.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, press the
corresponding button manually.

4 105
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

To defrost outside windshield

Automatic climate control system

To defrost outside windshield

To defog inside windshield

OMD044121

OMD044123

1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically.

1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defrost button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the
position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.

OMD044122

1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button manually.
If the
position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.

4 106
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Defogging logic

Manual climate control system

Automatic climate control system

When defogging logic is operating,
the air intake is controlled automatically (You can’t control the air intake)
according to certain conditions such
as
or
position to reduce the
probability of fogging up the inside of
the windshield. To cancel or return
the defogging logic, perform the following steps.

OMD044124

OMD044125

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defrost button ( ).
3. Push the air intake control button
at least 5 times within 10 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake
control button will blink 3 times with
0.5 second of interval. It indicates that
the defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Select the defrost position pressing defrost button ( ).
3. While holding the air conditioning
button (A/C) pressed, press the air
intake control button at least 5
times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake control
button blinks 3 times with 0.5 second
of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the system resets to
the programmed defogging logic.

4 107
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the system resets to
the programmed defogging logic.

Auto defogging system
(if equipped)

This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture of inside the windshield and operates.
Example if auto defogging does not
defog inside the windshield at step 1
Operating the air conditioning. it tries
to defog again at step 2 Outside air
position.

OMD040126

Auto defogging reduces the probability of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.

4 108
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Step 1 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 2 : Outside air position
Step 3 : Blowing air toward the windshield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
Step 5 : Maximizing the air conditioning

Features of your vehicle

If your vehicle is equipped with the
auto defogging system, it is automatically activated when the conditions
are met. However, if you would like to
cancel the auto defogging system,
press the front defroster button for 3
seconds. The indicator will blink 3
times to notify you that the system is
cancelled. To use the auto defogging
system again, follow the procedures
mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected
or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.

✽ NOTICE
• When the air conditioning is
turned on by Auto defogging system, if you try to turn off the air
conditioning, the indicator will
blink 3 times and the air conditioning will not be turned off.
• For efficiency, do not select recirculated air position while Auto
defogging system is operating.

CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered
by your vehicle warranty.

4 109
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Never store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

WARNING

Center console storage

ALWAYS keep the storage compartment covers closed securely while driving. Items inside
your vehicle are moving as fast
as the vehicle. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, the items may fly out
of the compartment and may
cause an injury if they strike the
driver or a passenger.
OMD040127

CAUTION
To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.

4 110
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.

Features of your vehicle

Sliding armrest (if equipped)

Glove box

WARNING
ALWAYS close the glove box
door after use. An open glove
box door can cause serious
injury to the passenger in an
accident, even if the passenger
is wearing a seat belt.

CAUTION
OMD040128

OMD040129

To move the armrest forward:
Grab the front portion of the armrest
(1) then pull it forward.

To open the glove box, push the button and the glove box will automatically open.

Do not keep food in the glove
box for a long time.

To move the armrest rearward:
Push the armrest rearward.

WARNING
Do not grab the front portion of
the armrest (1) when moving
the armrest rearward. You may
pinch your fingers.

4 111
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Sunglass holder (if equipped)

OMD041130L

To open the sunglass holder:
Press the cover and the holder will
slowly open. Place your sunglasses
in the compartment door with the
lenses facing out.

WARNING
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in the
holder.

To close the sunglass holder:
Push back into position. Make sure
the sunglass holder is closed while
driving.

4 112
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Clock

Whenever the battery terminals or
related fuses are disconnected, you
must reset the time.
To set the time:
The ignition switch must be in the
ACC position or the ON position.

With Audio system

OMD044138L

• H (Hour)
Each time you press the "H" button,
the clock will change backward by
one hour. Pressing and holding the
"H" button will change the clock
backward continuously.
Release the button at the desired
time.

• Display conversion
To change the 12 hour format to the
24 hour format, press the "H" and
"M" button simultaneously for more
than 4 seconds.
For example, if the "H" and "M" button is pressed when the time is 10:15
p.m., the display will change to 22:15

With Navigation system
The clock automatically sets itself to
the correct time.

WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while
driving, you may lose steering
control and cause an accident
that results in severe personal
injury or death.

• M (Minute)
Each time you press the "M" button,
the clock will change backward by
one minute. Pressing and holding the
"M" button will change the clock
backward continuously.
Release the button at the desired
time.

4 113
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Outside temperature

↔°F)
Temperature unit conversion (°C↔

The current outside temperature is
displayed.
The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately
like a general thermometer.

OMD044196A
OMD044196N

■ Type A
To change the temperature display
between Fahrenheit and Centigrade
(or Centigrade and Fahrenheit),
press and hold the "H" button, then
press the "M" button for 3 seconds.

4 114
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

■ Type B
To change the temperature display to
Fahrenheit, press the "°F" button.
To change the temperature display to
Centigrade, press the "°C" button.

Features of your vehicle

Cup holder

WARNING - Hot liquids

■ Front

OMD040134
■ Rear

• Do not place uncovered cups
with hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in
motion. If hot liquid spills, you
could be burned. Such a burn
to the driver could cause loss
of vehicle control resulting in
an accident.
• Avoid abrupt starting and
braking when the cup holder
is in use to prevent spilling
your drink. If hot liquid spills,
you could be burned. Such a
burn to the driver could cause
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
• Only use soft cups in the cup
holders. Hard objects can
injure you in an accident.

WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not put
them in a vehicle that is heated.
It may explode.

CAUTION
• When cleaning spilled liquids,
do not dry the cup holder at
high temperature. This may
damage the chrome part of the
cup holder.
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling
your drink. If liquid spills, it
may get into the vehicle's
electrical/electronic system
and damage electrical/electronic parts.

OMD040136

Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.

4 115
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Sunvisor

• Always have the vanity mirror
lamp switch in the OFF position
when the vanity mirror lamp is
not in use.
• Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor
to its original position after use.

Power outlet
■ Type A

WARNING
OHD046089L

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down
the sunvisor and slide the mirror
cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward (4) as needed. Use the ticket
holder (5) to hold tickets.

For your safety, do not block
your view when using the sunvisor.

OMD044302N
■ Type B

CAUTION
Always use the sunvisor extension, after swinging the sunvisor to the side.
OMD044137

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 15
amps with the engine running.

4 116
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

WARNING
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not
place your fingers or foreign
objects (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet or touch the power outlet
with a wet hand.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the Power
Outlets:
• Use the power outlet only
when the engine is running
and remove the accessory
plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the
engine off could cause the
battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electrical accessories which are less than 15A
in electrical capacity.
(Continue)

(Continue)
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power
outlet.
• Close the cover when not in
use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in
other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it
will go. If good contact is not
made, the plug may overheat
or the internal temperature
fuse may open.

Clothes hanger (if equipped)
■ Type A

OUN026348
■ Type B

OMDS042193

To hang items, pull down the upper
portion of the hanger. (Type A)
These hangers are not designed to
hold large or heavy items.

4 117
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

WARNING

Floor mat anchor(s)

WARNING

Do not hang other objects
except clothes. In an accident it
may cause vehicle damage or
personal injury.

OMD040195N

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors
to attach the front floor mats to the
vehicle. The anchors on the front
floor carpet keep the floor mats from
sliding forward.
Your vehicle was manufactured with
driver's side floor mat anchors that
are designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation,
HYUNDAI recommends that the
HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use
in your vehicle be installed.

4 118
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

If a floor mat is the wrong size
or not properly installed, it can
interfere with the accelerator or
the brake pedal while driving.
Take the following precautions
when installing any floor mat:
• ALWAYS ensure the floor mats
are securely attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchor(s)
and do not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal
before driving the vehicle.
• Use only the HYUNDAI floor
mats designed for use in your
vehicle.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat).
• Only a single floor mat should
be installed in each position.
• Do not place anything on top
of the driver side floor mat.
• Do not place the floor mats bottom- side up or upside down.

Features of your vehicle

Luggage net holder
(if equipped)

WARNING
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

OYF049225

To keep items from shifting in the
trunk, you can use the 4 holders
located in the trunk to attach the luggage net.
Make sure the luggage net is securely
attached to the holders in the trunk.

4 119
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE

Shark fin antenna (if equipped)
The shark fin antenna will receive the
transmit data.

Antenna (if equipped)

• If you install an after market HID
(high intensity discharge) head
lamp, your vehicle's audio and
electronic devices may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,
hand cleaner, and air freshener
from contacting the interior parts
because they may cause damage
or discoloration.

CAUTION

OMD044161

When the radio power switch is
turned on while the ignition key is in
either the “ON” or “ACC” position,
your car will receive both AM and FM
broadcast signals through the antenna in the rear window glass.

4 120
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a
cleaner or scraper to remove
foreign deposits as this may
cause damage to the antenna
elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Nickel, Cadmium, and
so on. These can disturb the
reception of AM and FM broadcast signals.

Features of your vehicle

Steering wheel audio control
(if equipped)
■ Type A

CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
1. VOLUME (VOL+/-)
• Push the lever upward (+) to
increase the volume.
• Push the lever downward (-) to
decrease the volume.

2. PRESET/SEEK ( /
)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different functions based on the system
mode.
For the following functions the button
should be pressed for 0.8 second or
more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.

OMD040139N
■ Type B

CD/USB/iPod mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 0.8 second, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION buttons.

OMD040139

The steering wheel may incorporate
audio control buttons.

CD/USB/iPod mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
button.

4 121
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

3. MODE
Press the button to change audio
source.
- FM(1~2) ➟ AM ➟ SAT(1~3) ➟ CD
➟ USB AUX(iPod) FM...

Aux, USB and iPod® port

FM reception

4. MUTE (if equipped)
• Press the button to mute the
sound.
• Press the button to turn off the
microphone during a telephone
call.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this chapter.

How vehicle audio works

¢ ¢ ¢

OMD040140

JBM001

If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port, you
can use an aux port to connect audio
devices and an USB port to plug in
an USB and iPod.

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.

✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

4 122
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.

AM reception

¢ ¢¢

FM radio station

¢ ¢¢

JBM002

JBM003

AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance, low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, mountains, and obstructions. This can lead
to undesirable or unpleasant listening conditions which might lead you
to believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:

4 123
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.

¢ ¢¢

JBM004

JBM005

• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several
directions can cause distortion or
fluttering. This can be caused by a
direct and reflected signal from the
same station, or by signals from two
stations with close frequencies. If
this occurs, select another station
until the condition has passed.

4 124
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

CAUTION
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle, a
separate external antenna must
be fitted. When a cellular phone
or a radio set is used with an
internal antenna alone, it may
interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect
safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.

Features of your vehicle

Caring for disc
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows to ventilate before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission.
Use CDs that are created only by
lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, use normal cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CDR/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally according to
the manufacturing companies. In
such circumstances, continued
use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.

NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order :
to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.

✽ NOTICE - Playing an

Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.

4 125
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

WARNING
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention of
traffic conditions and increase
the likelihood of accidents.
Use the phone feature after
parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)

4 126
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product malfunction. Continued use in such
conditions could lead to accidents(fires, electric shock) or
product malfunctions.
• Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehicle ignition turned on.
Prolonged use with the ignition turned off could result in
battery discharge.

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION
• Operating the device while
driving could lead to accidents
due to a lack of attention to
external surroundings. First
park the vehicle before operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle.
Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard
may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting when turning the device
on. A sudden output of extreme
volume upon turning the
device on could lead to hearing
impairment. (Adjust the volume
to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long
periods of time with the ignition
turned off as such operations
may lead to battery discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch
screen.
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
device and use a dry and
smooth cloth. Never use
tough materials, chemical
cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as
such materials may damage
the device panel or cause
color/quality deterioration.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• In case of product malfunction, please contact your closest authorized Hyundai dealer.
• Placing the audio system
within an electromagnetic
environment may result in
noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause damage or discoloration.

4 127
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE - USING THE
USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the
vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play unauthenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files
with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression
rate
between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB
device.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the
connected external USB device
can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device
is not either 512BYTE or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact with the human body or
other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a
short period of time, it may
break the device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.
(Continued)

4 128
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or
in another mode. (e.g, Radio,
CD)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Playing videos through the USB
is not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music files
on the highest-priority drive are
recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported.
(i-stick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB)
can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,
etc.) or external-HDD type
devices can be unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory
may be lost while using this
audio. Always back up important data on a personal storage
device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory products which can be
used as key chains or
cellular phone accessories as
they could cause damage to the
USB jack. Please make certain
only to use plug type connector
products.

4 129
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE - USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• Some iPod® models may not
support communication protocol and files may not properly
play.
Supported iPod® models:
- iPhone® 3GS/4
- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod® classic
• The order of search or playback
of songs in the iPod® can be different from the order searched
in the audio system.
• If the iPod® is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the
iPod®. (Reset: Refer to iPod®
manual)
• An iPod® may not operate normally on low battery.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Some iPod® devices, such as the
iPhone® , can be connected
through the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology interface. The
device must have audio
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
capability (such as for stereo
headphone Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology).
The device can play, but it will
not be controlled by the audio
system.
• To use iPod® features within the
audio, use the cable provided
upon purchasing an iPod®
device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the
characteristics of your iPod®/
iPhone® device.
• If your iPhone® is connected to
both the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone®, select the Dock
connector
or
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology to change
the sound output (source).
(Continued)

4 130
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)
• When connecting iPod® with the
iPod® Power Cable, insert the
connector to the multimedia
socket completely. If not inserted completely, communications
between iPod® and audio may
be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound
effects of the iPod® and the
audio system, the sound effects
of both devices will overlap and
might reduce or distort the
quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod® when
adjusting the audio system’s
volume, and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when
using the equalizer of an iPod®.
• When not using iPod® with car
audio, detach the iPod® cable
from iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®
may remain in accessory mode,
and may not work properly.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
• The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and
any use of such marks is under
license.
A Bluetooth® enabled call phone is
required to use Bluetooth® wireless technology.
• Bluetooth® Wirelss Technology
phone compatibility can be checked
by visiting www. hyundaiusa.com
and under the SERVICE & PARTS
- BLUETOOTH COMPATIBILITY menu.

✽ NOTICE - BEFORE USING
THE Bluetooth®
HANDSFREE
Bluetooth®

What is
?
• Bluetooth® refers to a short-distance wireless networking technology which uses a 2.4GHz ~
2.48GHz frequency to connect
various devices
within a certain
distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and automotive environments, Bluetooth®
allows data to be transmitted at high
speeds without having to use a connector cable.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to
conveniently make phone calls
with Bluetooth® mobile phones
through the audio system.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be supported in some mobile phones. To
learn more about mobile device compatibility, visit www. hyundaiusa.com.

✽ NOTICE - PRECAUTIONS
FOR SAFE DRIVING
• Bluetooth® is a feature that enables
drivers to use handsfree while
driving. Connecting the head unit
with a Bluetooth® phone allows the
user to conveniently make and
receive calls and use contacts.
Before using Bluetooth®, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driving practices and result in accidents. Refrain from excessive
operations while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driving, view the screen only for short
periods of time.

4 131
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - WHEN CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
PHONE
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone supports
Bluetooth® features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth®, the phone will not be
found during device searches if the
phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth® power is turned
off. Disable the hidden state or
turn on the Bluetooth® power
prior to searching/connecting with
the Head unit.
• Bluetooth phone is automatically
connected when the ignition is
turned on.
• If you do not want automatic connection with your Bluetooth®
device, turn off the Bluetooth® feature within your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile
phone.
connection
may
• Bluetooth®
become intermittently disconnected in some mobile phones. Follow
these steps to try again.
1.Within the mobile phone, turn
the Bluetooth® function off/on
and try again.
2.Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3.Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4.Reboot the Audio System and
try again.
5.Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may differ depending on the
model of your mobile phone.

4 132
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - USING THE
VOICE RECOGNITION
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation of the voice recognition system, pressing any key other than
the
key terminate voice recognition mode.
• For superior voice recognition
performance, position the microphone used for voice recognition
above the head of the driver’s seat
and maintain a proper position
when saying commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the wind of the cooling /
heating device is strong
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)

(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands
can be used only when a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some time to convert the
phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly
operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation.

4 133
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences.
Before reading the manual, check the following.
■ DOT LCD type audio
Press the SETUP key Select [Phone]
1. If you CAN find “Audio Streaming” menu,
(Go to 135 page)

2. If you CANNOT find “Audio Streaming” menu,
(Go to 254 page)

■ Color LCD type audio
Press the SETUP key Select [Phone]
1. If you CAN find “Streaming Audio” menu,
(Go to 184 page)

2. If you CANNOT find “Streaming Audio” menu,
(Go to 302 page)

4 134
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM1B0MDKN F/L, AM1B0MDAN F/L, AM1B1MDAN F/L

4 135
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM180MDKN F/L, AM180MDAN F/L

❋ No

logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

4 136
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit

1.
(EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2. RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM/XM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
❈In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .

When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 6 to select the
desired mode.
3. MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB, iPod, AUX,
My Music, BT Audio modes.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB, iPod, AUX, My Music, BT
Audio modes.
❈In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 5 to select the
desired mode.
4. PHONE
• Operates Phone Screen
❈When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5. PWR/VOL knob
•
Power Knob: Turns power
On/Off by pressing the knob
•
Volume Knob: Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right
6. 1 ~ 6 (Preset)
• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode
- 1 : Repeat
- 2 : Random
• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
SEEK

7. TRACK
• Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes :
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Moves to next or previous song(file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song(file)
4 137

Features of your vehicle

8. DISP
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it
sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.

9. SCAN
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broad1
casts saved in Preset
~
6
for 5 seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈ SiriusXMTM Radio does not support the Preset scan feature.
• CD, USB, iPod mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
10. SETUP
• Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Phone, System setting
modes

4 138
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

11. MENU
• Displays menus for the current
mode.
12. TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod mode: Searches
songs (files) by turning the knob
left/right
❈When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus
CAT

13. FOLDER
• Radio Mode
- SiriusXMTM RADIO : Category
Search
• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder
Search
• iPod mode: Moves to parent folder
❈May differ depending on the selected audio.

Features of your vehicle

Audio Head Unit
(For NON Bluetooth model)

14. FM/AM
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM.
15. SAT
• Changes to SiriusXMTM mode.

4 139
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM110MDAN F/L

❋ No

will be shown if the SiriusXMTM feature is not supported.

4 140
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM110MDAN F/L

❋ No
❋ No

will be shown if the SiriusXMTM feature is not supported.
logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

4 141
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit

1.
(EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2. RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM/XM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM

❈In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 6 to select the
desired mode.
3. MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB, iPod, AUX,
My Music, BT Audio modes.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB, iPod, AUX, My Music, BT
Audio modes.
❈In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 5 to select the
desired mode.
4. PHONE
• Operates Phone Screen
❈When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.

4 142
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

9. SCAN
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broad1
casts saved in Preset
~
6
for 5 seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈ XM Radio does not support the
Preset scan feature.
• CD, USB, iPod mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
10. SETUP
• Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Phone, System setting
modes

4 143
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Audio Head Unit
(For NON Bluetooth model)

14. FM
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2.
15. AM
• Changes to AM mode.

4 144
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

SETUP
Display Settings
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] through
TUNE knob or
1
key Select menu through
TUNE knob

Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes On / Off
selection mode
• During On state, press the RADIO
or MEDIA key to display the mode
change pop up screen.

Text Scroll
[Text Scroll] Set On / Off
• On : Maintains scroll
• Off : Scrolls only one (1) time.

Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

4 145
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

SOUND SETTINGS

Speed Dependent Volume
Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [SDVC] Turn SDVC On/Off
by pressing the
Tune knob.

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Sound] through
TUNE knob or
2
key Select menu through
TUNE knob

Sound Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through
TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈Back : While adjusting values,
pressing the
TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.

4 146
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE knob

4 147
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM SETTINGS
Press the SETUP key Select [System]
through tune knob or 4 key Select
menu through
TUNE knob

Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.

• Expert(Off) : This mode is for expert
users and omits some information
during voice command operation.
(When using Expert mode, guidance instructions can be heard
through the [Help] or [Menu] commands.

Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through TUNE
knob

Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE knob
• Normal(On) : This mode is for
beginner users and provides
detailed instructions during voice
command operation.

4 148
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

❈The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol

Features of your vehicle

RADIO : FM, AM OR
SIRIUSXMTM

Preset SEEK

SCAN

Press the 1 ~ 6 key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from 1 ~ 6
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.

Press the SCAN key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
After scanning all frequencies,
returns and plays the current
broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 ~ 6
for 5 seconds each.

SEEK
SEEK

Press the TRACK key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically searches for the next frequency.

Selecting through manual
search
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 10KHz

4 149
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.Store
Press the MENU key Set [A.Store]
through
TUNE knob or 1 key
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to 1 ~ 6 keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.

4 150
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

SIRIUSXMTM RADIO

SEEK

Category
SEEK
TRACK

Using XM satellite Radio
Your vehicle is equipped with a 3
month complimentary period of XM
Satellite Radio. XM provides access
to over 130 channels of music, information, and entertainment programming.

Press the
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): select previous or next
channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): continuously move
to previous or next channel.
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.

SCAN
Press the SCAN key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broadcast for 10 seconds each
❈Press the SCAN key again to continue listening to the current frequency
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.

CAT
Press the FOLDER
the
TUNE knob

key Set through

• The display will indicate the category menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press
CAT
the FOLDER
key to navigate category list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.

4 151
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Preset

Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the MENU key
Select [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or 1 key

Info (Information)

Tune
• Rotate
TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls category list.
• Press
TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.

Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.

4 152
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod® / My Music
Press the MEDIA key to change the
mod mode in order of CD ➟
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.

Repeat

Random

1
While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)):
Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (Pressing the key
twice).
❈Press the 1 key again to turn
off repeat.

While song (file) is playing 2 RDM
(RDM) key
Audio CD, iPod®, My Music mode:
RDM on screen
• Random (press the key : Plays all
songs in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (press the key :
Plays all files within the current
folder in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode : ALL RDM on
screen
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays
all files in random order.
❈Press the 2 RDM key again to turn
off repeat.

The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
❈The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.

4 153
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Changing Song/File
SEEK
TRACK

While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the current song
from the beginning.
SEEK
❈If the
key is pressed
TRACK
again within 1 second, the previous
song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
SEEK
While song (file) is playing
TRACK
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the
song.

Scan

Searching Songs (File)

While song (file) is playing SCAN key
Scans all songs for 10 seconds starting from the next song.
❈Press the SCAN key again to turn
off.
❈The SCAN function is not supported in iPod mode.

• Turning
TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing
TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
CAT

While file is playing FOLDER
(Folder Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
CAT
While file is playing
FOLDER
(Folder Down) key
• Searches the previous folder.
❈If a folder is selected by pressing
the
TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.

4 154
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode
to set the Repeat,
Information features.

Random
key
Random,

Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.

Information

Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1
key to repeat the current song.
❈Press RPT again to turn off.

Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
TUNE knob or 3
through the
key to display information of the current song.
❈Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

4 155
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode
key
to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.
MENU

Folder Repeat

Copy

Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key to repeat songs within the current folder.
❈Press F.RPT again to turn off.

Press the MENU key Set [ Copy]
through the
TUNE knob or 6
key.
This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel copying is displayed.
❈If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copying is canceled.
❈Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.

All Random

Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1
key to repeat the current song.
❈Press RPT again to turn off.

Folder Random
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
❈Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Press the MENU key Set [ A.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 4 key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD.
❈Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 5
key to display information of the current song.
❈Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

4 156
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

MENU : iPod®
In iPod mode, press the
key
to set the Repeat, Random,
Information and Search features.
®

Information

MENU : My Music Mode

Press the
key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

In My Music mode, press the MENU
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.

Search
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Press the MENU key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE knob or 4
key.
Displays iPod® category list.
❈Searching iPod® category is
MENU key pressed, move to parent category.

Random

Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or 1 key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.

Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 2 key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing folder in random order.
❈Press RDM again to turn random
off.

4 157
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Information

Delete All

AUX

Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or 3 key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or 5 key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.

AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connected to the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the MEDIA key to
change to AUX mode.

Delete
Press the MENU key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or 4 key.
• Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
• Deletes file from list
➀Select the file you wish to delete by
using the
TUNE knob.

Delete Selection
Press the MENU key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or 6 key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.

❈AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
➁After selecting, press the MENU
key and select the delete menu.

➁Press the MENU key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
4 158
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology AUDIO
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology?
®

Bluetooth Wireless Technology allows
devices to be connected in a short distance, including hands-free devices,
stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit
®
the Bluetooth Wireless Technology
website at www.Bluetooth.com
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned On .
❈Setting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Audio Streaming :
Press the SETUP key Select
[Phone] through the tune knob or
3 key Select [Audio Streaming]
through the
TUNE knob Set
On / Off

Starting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio

Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the
TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.

❈The play / pause functions may not
be supported in some mobile
phones.

• Press the MEDIA key to change
the mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will
start playing.
❈Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.

4 159
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

PHONE (IF EQUIPPED)

Making a call using the Steering
wheel remote controller

Before using the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone features
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the first Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you
do not want automatic Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone connection, set the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology power to OFF.

❈The actual feature in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
1.VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2.MUTE button : Mute the microphone during a call.
3.
button : Places and transfers
calls.
4.
button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.

4 160
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

• Check call history and making call
➀Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the
key on the steering
remote controller.
➁The call history list will be displayed on the screen.
➂Press the
key again to connect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
➀Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the
key on the steering
remote controller.
➁The most recently called number is
redialed.

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology feature.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.

4 161
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Pairing PHONE Key /
Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the PHONE key or the
key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.

2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.

1) Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device
3.From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.

[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Hear, enter the passkey “0000” to
pair your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey
.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device and confirm.

5. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

4 162
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

During the pairing process, make sure
that all connection requests on the
phone are accepted for phonebook
download and to allow acceptance of
all future connection requests. Visit
http://www.hyundaiusa.com/Bluetooth
for additional information on pairing
your Bluetooth-enabled mobile
phone, and to view a phone compatibility list.

✽ NOTICE

If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the
PHONE key or the
key on the
steering wheel displays the following
screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a
new device or select [Connect] to
connect a previously paired device.

4 163
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the SETUP key
Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob

•
•
•
1.The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.

✽ NOTICE
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls

•

- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
Only one Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device can be connected at a time.
Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is connected.
Only
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
Handsfree
and
Bluetooth audio related features
are supported.
Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth audio device.

4 164
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

• If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the
device OFF, or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology communication
error,
corresponding
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are automatically searched
and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon resetting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
• After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.

Features of your vehicle

Connecting a Device

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].

Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected

4 165
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.

✽ NOTICE
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priority
phone.

Disconnecting a Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.

4 166
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Deleting a Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

✽ NOTICE
• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.

4 167
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

USING Bluetooth®
WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY
(IF EQUIPPED)
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device connected, press the PHONE
key to display the Phone menu screen.

✽ NOTICE
• If you select the [Call History] button but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed
which asks to download contacts
data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.

Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press
key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.

1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number

1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2) Call History : Device the call history
list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.

4 168
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.

Favorites
Press the
[Favorites]

Call History
PHONE

key

Select

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.

✽ NOTICE
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.

Press the
History]

PHONE

key

Select [Call

A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call history stored or a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 20 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
4 169

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Contacts
Press the
[Contacts]

PHONE

key Select

The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the MENU key.

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded
data is maintained even if the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device has been disconnected.
(However, the contacts and call history saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.

4 170
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact
download feature has been turned
off within the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device. In addition,
some devices may require device
authorization upon attempting to
download contacts. If downloading
does not normally occur, check the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device settings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of
supported Bluetooth® devices and
function support, refer to your
phone’s user manual.

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Setting
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Hyundai is under
license. Other trademarks and trade
names are those of their respective
owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell
phone is required to use Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.

Pairing a New Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Viewing Paired Phone List
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section within Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

4 171
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connection priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen

✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWNLOADING CONTACTS
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.

✽ NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone contacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate while contacts are being downloaded.

4 172
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Auto Download (Contacts)

✽ NOTICE

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Auto Download]

• The Auto Download feature will
download mobile contacts entries
every time the phone is connected.
The download time may differ
depending on the number of saved
contacts entries and the communication state.
• Before downloading contacts, first
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the contacts
download feature.

This feature is used to automatically
download mobile contacts entries once
a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone is connected.

Audio Streaming
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]

When Audio Streaming is turned on,
you can play music files saved in
your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device through the audio system.

4 173
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Outgoing Volume
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Turning Bluetooth System Off
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.

Use
TUNE knob to adjust the outgoing volume level.

✽ NOTICE
While on a call, the volume can be
SEEK
changed by using the TRACK
key.

4 174
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

✽ NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and select “Yes”.

Features of your vehicle

VOICE RECOGNITION

✽ NOTICE

Using Voice Recognition

For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and
beep tone.

Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
key on the
steering wheel. Say a command.

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System]
[Prompt Feedback]

Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4) Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).

Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stated Shortly press the
key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the
key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
command.

4 175
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the
key on the
steering remote controller

✽ NOTICE
• While using voice command,
pressing any steering wheel control or a different key will end
voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold
the
key on the steering wheel
to end voice command.

Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Hyundai Voice Recognition
System may have difficulty understanding some accents or uncommon names.
When using Voice Recognition to
place a call, speak in a moderate
tone, with clear pronunciation To
maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guidelines when storing contacts:
• Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
always use full names (including first
and last names) for these contacts
• Do not use special characters
(e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County Finance
Department" instead of "C. F. D."; Be
sure to say the name exactly as it is
entered in the contacts list

4 176
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds):
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)

More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.

Beep~
More Help

• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the
(BEEP)

Contacts

• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds):
Please say a...

key (under 0.8 seconds):

Contacts.
Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.

while guidance message is being stated

Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)

Cancel

(BEEP)
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
More Help

4 177
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command
More Help
Help
Call
Phone

Favorites
Call History
Contacts
(Call by Name)

Dial Number

Redial
Tutorial

Function
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Calls saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Display the Favorite screen.
Displays the Call History screen.
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Connects the most recently called number.
Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth® connections.

Command

Radio

FM1(FM One)
FM2(FM Two)
AM
FM Preset 1~6
AM Preset 1~6
FM 87.5~107.9
AM 530~1710
SiriusXMTM

4 178
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Function
• When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟
XM2➟XM3➟FM1)
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
• When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
Displays the FM1 screen.
Displays the FM2 screen.
Displays the AM screen.
Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
• When currently listening to the SiriusXMTM,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXMTM screen.

Features of your vehicle

Command
SiriusXMTM 1~3
SiriusXMTM
Channel 0~255
Media
CD
USB
iPod®

Function
Displays the selected XM screen.
Plays the selected XM channel.
Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Plays the music saved in the CD.
Plays USB music.
Plays iPod music.

Command
Function
My Music
Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary)
Plays the connected external device.
®
Bluetooth Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
device.
Please repeat
Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute
Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit)
Ends voice command.

4 179
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during
FM, AM radio operation
Command
Preset 1~6
Scan
Preset Scan
Information

Function
Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Displays the information of the current broadcast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)

• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command
Channel 0~255
Scan
Preset 1~6
Information

4 180
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Function
Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Displays the information of the current broadcast.

Features of your vehicle

• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Track 1~30

Function
Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.
Plays the desired track number.

• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during USB and MP3 CD operation
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Information
Next Folder
Previous Folder

Function
Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Play the first file in the next folder
Play the first file in the previous folder

4 181
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

• iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod®
operation
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off

Function
Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.
Repeats the current song.
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Delete

4 182
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Function
Randomly plays all saved files.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.

Features of your vehicle

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless
Technologyaudio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation
Command
Play
Pause

Function
Plays the currently paused song.
Pauses the current song.

SiriusXM™ service requires a subscription, sold
separately, after 3-month trial included with vehicle
purchase. If you decide to continue your
SiriusXM™ service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically
renew and bill at then-current rates until you call us
at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See our Customer
Agreement
for
complete
terms
at
www.siriusxm.com. Other fees and taxes apply. All
fees and programming are subject to change.
Sirius satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA, D.C.,
and PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our satellite
service area and in AK and HI. Certain channels are
not available on our Internet radio service or on
mobile devices. SiriusXM Traffic available in select
markets. See siriusxm.com/traffic for more information. © 2013 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of
Sirius XM Radio Inc. iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital device sold
separately. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by Hyundai is under
license. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is
required to use Bluetooth® wireless technology. All
rights reserved.

4 183
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM9B0MDKN, AM9B0MDAN, AM9B1MDAN

4 184
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM980MDKN, AM980MDAN

❋ No

logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

4 185
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit

2. RADIO
• Convert to Radio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of FM1,
FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3.
3. MEDIA
• Convert to Media Mode
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.

1.
(EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.

4. PHONE (for Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology equipped model)
• Converts to Phone mode
❈When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
5. PWR/VOL knob
•
Power : Press to turn power
on/off.
•
Volume : Turn left/right to control volume.

4 186
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SEEK
TRACK

• When pressed shortly(under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next
frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : changes the track,
Song(file)
• When pressed and held (Over 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : continuously
changes the frequency. Upon
release, plays the current frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls
the call volume.
CAT

7. FOLDER
• XM RADIO™ : Category Search
• CD/USB/MP3 mode : Search
Folder

Features of your vehicle

10. SCAN
• Radio Mode : previews all receivable broadcasts for 5 seconds
each.
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes :
previews each song (file) for 10 seconds each.
• XM Mode : previews all receivable
broadcasts for 10 seconds each.

8. DISP
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
9. MUTE
When the button is pressed,
stopssound and "Audio Mute" is displayedon LCD.

Audio Head Unit
(For NON Bluetooth model)

11. SETUP
Converts to Setup mode.
12.
TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : turn to search tracks/
channels/files.
13. DISC-IN LED
• LED that indicates whether a disc
is inserted.

14. FM/AM
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM.
15. SAT
• Changes to SiriusXMTM mode.

4 187
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM910MDAN
14. RESET
• Forced system termination and system
restart.

❋ No

will be shown if the SiriusXMTM feature is not supported.

4 188
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM900MDAN

❋ No
❋ No

will be shown if the SiriusXMTM feature is not supported.
logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

4 189
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit

2. RADIO
• Convert to Radio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of FM1,
FM2, AM.
3. MEDIA
• Convert to Media Mode
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.

1.
(EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.

4 190
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SEEK
TRACK

mode

Features of your vehicle

8. DISP
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
9. MUTE
When the button is pressed,
stopssound and "Audio Mute" is displayedon LCD.

Audio Head Unit
(For NON Bluetooth model)

11. SETUP
Converts to Setup mode.
12.
TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change broadcast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : turn to search tracks/ channels/files.

13.

• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2.
14. AM
• Changes to AM mode.

4 191
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

❈ The actual feature in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.

2. SEEK
• When pressed shortly (under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : searches broadcast
frequencies saved to presets.
- Media(CD / USB / iPod® / My
Music / BT Audio) modes :
changes the track, file or chapter.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- Radio
mode,
automatically
searches broadcast frequencies
and channels
- Media(CD / USB / iPod® / My
Music) modes, rewinds or fast forwards the track or song(file)
- BT Audio mode may not be supported in some mobile phones.

1. VOLUME
• Used to control volume.

3. MUTE
• Mutes audio volume.

Making a call using the
Steering-wheel mounted controls

4 192
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4. MODE
• Each time this key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3 ➟
CD ➟ USB or iPod ➟ AUX ➟ My
Music ➟ BT Audio
• If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, corresponding
modes will be disabled.

Features of your vehicle

5.
• When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and
converts to voice command waiting state
• When pressed and held
(over 0.8 seconds)
- Ends voice recognition

6.
• When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone
screen, displays call history
screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call
screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting)
• When pressed and held
(over 0.8 seconds)
- When pressed in the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call
- When
pressed
during
a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree call, switches call back
to mobile phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on the
mobile phone, switches call back
to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree (Operates only when
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree is connected)

7.
• Ends phone call

4 193
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

SIRIUSXM™ RADIO MODE
Features of your vehicle
Satellite radio reception

• If you are driving in a valley where
the surrounding hills or peaks
block the signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving on a mountain
road where is the signal blocked by
mountains.

SATELLITE1

You may experience difficulties in
receiving XM satellite™ radio signals
in the following situations.
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a
covered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top
level of a multi-level freeway.
• If you are driving under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks
the signal.

SATELLITE2

• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (30 ft.
/10m or more), for example on an
road that goes through a dense forest.
• The signal can become weak in
some areas that are not covered
by the XM repeater network.

4 194
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

NOTE:
There may also be additional
unforeseen circumstances leading
to reception problems with the XM
satellite™ radio signal.
Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH
Unavailable’ may occur when starting XM Radio™.

Features of your vehicle

Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Channel Information
Displays the category, channel number, channel name, artist and title
information.
3. Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.

4 195
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Using SEEK
SEEK
TRACK

Press the
key to play the
previous/next channel.
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.

Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
CAT
key and press the
FOLDER
TUNE knob to select.

Selecting Presets/Saving
Presets
Press the Preset button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.

Using Tune
Turn the
TUNE knob to select the
desired channel.

SCAN
Press the SCAN key to scan all
channels with superior reception for
10 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previously played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the SCAN
key again will cancel the scan operation and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the current category.

Channels for the selected category
are played.

Press the 1 ~ 6
the desired preset.

buttons to play

✽ NOTICE
While listening to a channel you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the 1 ~ 6 preset
buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
the current channel to the selected
preset.

4 196
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE - USING THE
DISCS
• This device has been manufactured to be compatible with software bearing the following logo
marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids, benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc
back in its original case to prevent
disc scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within the center hole to prevent damages to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances into the disc insert/eject
slot. Introducing foreign substances could damage the device
interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultaneously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and
playing times may occur depending on the disc manufacturer, production method and the recording method as used by the user.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Clean fingerprints and dust off
the disc surface (coated side)
with a soft cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result
in disc slot jams or difficulties in
disc removal. Such discs may
also result in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may
not properly operate depending
on the disc manufacturer, production method and the record
method as used by the user. If
problems persist, trying using a
different CD as continued use
may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this product may differ depending on the
CD-RW Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as Stype CDs may not function in
the device. DATA discs cannot
be played. (However, such discs
may still operate but will do so
abnormally.)
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Do not use abnormally shaped
discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-shaped) as such discs could
lead to malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the
disc slot without removal for 10
seconds, the disc will automatically be re-inserted into the disc
player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result
in recognition failure (e.g. copy
CD-R, CDs with labels)

4 197
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

MEDIA MODE

Title Icon

Pressing the MEDIA key will change
the operating mode in order of CD ➟
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.

When a Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology, iPod®, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.

Icon

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
SETUP [Display], then pressing the
MEDIA key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the
TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.

Title
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
CD
iPod®
USB
AUX

✽ NOTICE
The media mode pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are two
or more media modes turned on.

4 198
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

AUDIO CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen

4. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
5. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
6. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track.
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.

1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating function.

8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
Moves to the list screen.

3. Track Info
Displays information about the current track.

4 199
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.

Changing Tracks
SEEK
Press the TRACK
key to move to
the previous or next track.

✽ NOTICE
SEEK
• Pressing the TRACK
key after the
track has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current track
from the beginning.
SEEK
• Pressing the TRACK
key before
the track has been playing for 1
seconds will start the previous
track.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

Selecting from the List
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.

button
button to

Once you find the desired track,
press the
TUNE knob to start
playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
SEEK
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
TRACK
rewind or fast-forward the current
track.

✽ NOTICE
• Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CDR, CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information
are displayed on the screen if
track information is included
within the audio CD.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

4 200
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current disc.

List
Press the List button to display the
track list screen.

Random(Shuffle)
Press the Shuffle button to play tracks
in random(Shuffle) order.
Press the Shuffle button again to turn
the Random(Shuffle) feature off.
• Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks
in random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current track. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current track.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.

4 201
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

MP3 CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen

4. File Info
Displays information about the current file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.

Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.

6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file.

1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file number.

8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen.

4 202
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

✽ NOTICE
If there are numerous files and folders within the disc, reading time
could take more than 10 seconds
and the list may not be displayed or
song searches may not operate.
Once loading is complete, try again.

Features of your vehicle

Changing Files
SEEK
Press the
key to move to
TRACK
the previous or next file.

✽ NOTICE
SEEK
• Pressing the TRACK
key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
SEEK
• Pressing the TRACK
key before
the file has been playing for 1 seconds will start the previous file.

Selecting from the List
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
SEEK
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
TRACK
rewind or fast-forward the current file.

MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Searching Folders
CAT

Press the FOLDER
key to select and
search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current file.

The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.

4 203
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is
set as the default display within
Display setup, the album/artist/file
information are displayed as
detailed file information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are displayed as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information are recorded within the
MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the Shuffle button to play files
in random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random (Shuffle)
All ➟ Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all
files within the current folder in
Random (Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files
in Random(Shuffle) order.

Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟Repeat Folder➟Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the Copy button to copy the
current file into My Music.

✽ NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes’.

4 204
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

List
Press the List button to display the
file list screen.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
• Connect the USB device after
turning on the engine. The USB
device may become damaged if it
is already connected when the
ignition is turned on.The USB
device may not operate properly if
the car ignition is turned on or off
with the USB device connected.
• Heed caution to static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting
USB devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• When connecting an external USB
device, the device may not properly recognize the USB is in some
states.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB
devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32
file formats. This device does not
recognize files in NTFS file format.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be supported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB
connector with bodily parts or foreign objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting of USB devices within short
periods of time may result in product malfunction.
• A strange noise may occur when
disconnecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the
audio power turned off.
• The amount of time required to
recognize the USB device may differ depending on the type, size or
file formats stored in the USB.
Such differences in time are not
indications of malfunctions.
• The device only supports USB
devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not
supported.

(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Such acts may lead
to worsened performance or damage to the device.
• The device may not recognize the
USB device if separately purchased USB hubs and extension
cables are being used. Connect the
USB directly with the multimedia
terminal of the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical
drives, only files saved to the root
drive can be played.
• Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
to the USBs.
• The device may not operate normally if MP3 Players, cellular
phones, digital cameras, or other
electronic devices (USB devices
not recognized as portable disk
drives) are connected with the
device.

(Continued)

4 205
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may
not work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal operation when using a USB
memory type besides (Metal
Cover Type) USB Memory.
• The device may not support normal operation when using formats
such as HDD Type, CF, or SD
Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by connecting an Adaptor (SD Type or
CF Type) may not be properly recognized.
• The device may not operate properly when using USB HDDs or
USBs subject to connection failures caused by vehicle vibrations.
(e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB
memory products that
can also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories. Use of such products
may cause damage to the USB
jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or
phone through various channels,
such as AUX/BT or Audio/ USB
mode may result in pop noises or
abnormal operation.

4 206
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

USB MODE
Basic Mode Screen

4. File Info
Displays information about the current file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.

10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
11. List
Moves to the list screen.

6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/Scan,
displays the currently operating function.

8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.

3. File Index
Displays the current file number.

4 207
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.

• Loading may require additional
time if there are many files and
folders within the USB and result
in faulty list display or file searching. Normal operations will resume
once loading is complete.
• The device may not support normal operation when using a USB
memory type besides (Metal
Cover Type) USB Memory.
Changing Files
SEEK
Press the TRACK
keys to move to
the previous or next file.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

✽ NOTICE
SEEK
TRACK

• Pressing the
key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
SEEK
• Pressing the TRACK
key before
the file has been playing for 1 seconds will start the previous file.

4 208
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Selecting from the List
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
SEEK
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
TRACK
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

Features of your vehicle

Searching Folders
CAT
Press the FOLDER key to select
and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.

USB Mode Menu

✽ NOTICE

Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.

• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set
as the default display within
Display setup, the album/artist/file
information are displayed as
detailed file information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are displayed as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information are recorded within the
MP3 file ID3 tag.

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current file.

Random (Shuffle)
Press the Shuffle button to play files
in random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of
Random(Shuffle) Folder➟Random
(Shuffle) All➟Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the
files in the current folder in random(Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all files
in random(Shuffle) order.

4 209
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all
files within the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the Copy button to copy the
current file into My Music.

✽ NOTICE

List
Press the List button to display the
file list screen.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.

Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes’.

4 210
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE - USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• iPod® is a registered trademark
of Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod® while
operating the keys, you must use
a dedicated iPod® cable. (the
cable that is supplied when purchasing iPod®/iPhone® products)
• If the iPod® is connected to the
vehicle while it is playing, a high
pitch sound could occur for
approximately 1-2 seconds
immediately after connecting. If
possible, connect the iPod to the
vehicle with the iPod® stopped/
paused.
• During ACC ON state, connecting the iPod® through the iPod®
cable will charge the iPod®
through the car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod®
cable, make sure to fully insert
the jack to prevent communication interference.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an
external device, such as the
iPod®, and the audio system are
both active, EQ effects could
overlap and cause sound deterioration and distortion.
Whenever possible, turn off the
EQ feature within the external
device upon use by connecting
with the audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod®
or AUX device is connected.
When such devices are not being
used, disconnect the device for
storage.
• When the iPod® or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such
cases, disconnect the power connection before use.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the
characteristics of your iPod®
/Phone® device.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• If your iPhone® is connected to
both the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone®, select the Dock
connector or Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology to change the sound
output (source).
• iPod mode cannot be operated
when the iPod® cannot be recognized due to versions that do not
support communication protocols.
• For fifth generation iPod® Nano
devices, the iPod® may not be
recognized when the battery
level is low. Please charge the
iPod® for use.
• Search/play orders shown within the iPod® device may differ
with the orders shown within
the audio system.
• If the iPod® malfunctions due to
an iPod® device defect, reset the
iPod® and try again. (To learn
more, refer to your iPod® manual)
(Continued)

4 211
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)
• Some iPod®s may not sync with
the System depending on its version. If the Media is removed
before the Media is recognized,
then the system may not properly restore the previously operated mode. (iPad® charging is not
supported.)

iPod® MODE
Basic Mode Screen

4. Song Info
Displays information about the current song.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.

1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle), displays the currently operating function.
3. Song Index
Displays the current song/total number of songs.

4 212
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
Moves to the list screen.

Features of your vehicle

Changing Songs

Using iPod® Mode

SEEK
TRACK

iPod®

Playing/Pausing
Songs
Once an iPod® is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod® song.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

✽ NOTICE
iPod®s with unsupported communication protocols may not properly
operate in the audio system.

Press the
key to move to
the previous or next song.

Searching Categories
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.

✽ NOTICE
SEEK
• Pressing the TRACK
key after the
song has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current song from the
beginning.
SEEK
• Pressing the TRACK
key before
the song has been playing for 1 seconds will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod® product.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
While playing, press and hold the
SEEK
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
TRACK
rewind or fast-forward the current
song.

Once you find the desired category,
press the
TUNE knob to select
and play.

✽ NOTICE
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.

4 213
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Category Menu
Within the iPod® Category menu,
you will have access to the
,
Home, and
features.

✽ NOTICE
• If the search mode is accessed
while playing a song, the most
recently searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connection may differ depending on the
type of iPod® device.

1.
: Displays the play screen
2. Home : Moves to the iPod® root category screen
3.
: Moves to the previous category

4 214
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

iPod® Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Random(Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.

Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song

AUX MODE

Using AUX Mode
Press the

MEDIA

key Select [AUX]

List
Press the List button to display the
Category Menu.

Random(Shuffle)
Press the Shuffle button to play
songs in random(Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all
songs in Random(Shuffle) order.

An external device can be connected
to play music.
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the
TUNE knob to select
and play.

4 215
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Connecting an External Device

✽ NOTICE

External audio players (Camcorders,
car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.

• If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is disconnected, the previous mode will
be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (camcorder, car VCR, etc.) has been
connected.
• The AUX volume can be controlled separately from other
audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not
being used, also remove the connector jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.

4 216
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

MY MUSIC MODE
Basic Mode Screen

3. File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files.
4. File Info
Displays information about the current file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.

9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Delete
Deletes the current file.
11. List
Moves to the list screen.

6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating function.

7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.

4 217
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files

Changing Files
SEEK
Press the
key to move to
TRACK
the previous or next file.

Selecting from the List
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.

button
button to

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
SEEK
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
TRACK
rewind or fast-forward the current file.

✽ NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the My Music button will be
disabled.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

4 218
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Delete and List features.

Random
Press the Shuffle button to play files
in random order. Press the button
again to turn the Random feature off.

List
Press the List
file list screen.

button to display the

Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the Delete button to delete the
current file.
Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current file.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.

✽ NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.

4 219
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.

1)
: Moves to the previous screen
2) Sellect All: Selects all files
3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected
files
4) Delete: Deletes selected files
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the Delete button to
delete the selected files.

Press the Select All button or individually select the files you want to
delete. Once files are selected, the
Unselect All button and Delete buttons
will be enabled.

4 220
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

✽ NOTICE
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied
more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go
to SETUP [System] [Memory
Information]

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only
when a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone has been connected.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones
that do not support this feature.
Wireless
• While
Bluetooth®
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises in some mobile
phones.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be supported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or making an outgoing call while playing
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio may result in audio interference.

4 221
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology AUDIO MODE
(IF EQUIPPED)
Using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Audio
Once a Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device is connected, the
mode will automatically start.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

✽ NOTICE
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
Changing Files
SEEK
Press the
key to move to
TRACK
the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the SETUP key [Phone] button to
display the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete features from your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone.

button
button to

4 222
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

✽ NOTICE
• If the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio is not operating
properly, check whether the feature
is turned off at SETUP [Phone]
[Streaming Audio]. If the feature is
off, turn back on and try again.
• If music is not yet playing from
your mobile device after converting
to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play button once may start playing the
mode. Check to see that music is
playing from the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device after
converting to Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Mode.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - PAIRING
THROUGH [PHONE]
SETUP
• The Bluetooth® and Voice
Recognition Manual is provided in
two versions due to software version differences.
• Before reading the manual, check
the following.
• Press the SETUP key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

• If you entered the Passkey within
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
• If the following screen is displayed
and a 6-digit passkey is checked
and confirmed within the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device.

• From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.

4 223
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology feature.

Pairing PHONE Key /
Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1.Press the PHONE key or the
key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.
2.Press the OK button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.

4 224
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE

[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device and confirm.

If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the
PHONE key or the
key on the
steering wheel displays the following
screen. Press the [Pair] button to
pair a new device or press the
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the SETUP key
Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob

1.The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.

5. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.
4 225
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device can be connected at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
Handsfree
and
Bluetooth audio related features
are supported.

• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the
device OFF, or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology communication
error,
corresponding
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are automatically searched
and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due
to communication errors between
the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device, the system will be restored.

4 226
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

• After pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.

Features of your vehicle

Connecting a Device
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
SETUP

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the Connect button.

1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected

4 227
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
Change priority button from the Menu.
The selected device will be changed
to the highest priority.

✽ NOTICE
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priority
phone.

Disconnecting a Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the Disconnect button.

4 228
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Deleting a Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the Delete button.

4 229
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

USING Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology

4) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
5) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings

Favorites
Press the
[Favorites]

PHONE

key Select

Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the PHONE key to display the Phone
menu screen.

1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
3) Call History : Device the call history list screen

✽ NOTICE
• If you press the [Call History]
button but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download call history
data.
• If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed
which asks to download contacts
data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.
3) Delete All : Delete all stored
favorite contacts

✽ NOTICE
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the contact has been updated in the phone.
To update Favorites, delete the
Favorite and create a new Favorite.

4 230
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the
Number]

PHONE

key Select [Dial

1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number
2) Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number If no
number has been entered, switches to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time

Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.

✽ NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.

1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Accept : Accept the incoming call
4) Reject : Reject the incoming call

4 231
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

zDuring a Handsfree Call

Call History
Press the
History]

1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off

✽ NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.

PHONE

key

Select [Call

A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the Download button to download the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.

4 232
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 20 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Contacts
Press the
[Contacts]

PHONE

key Select

The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the Download button to download the call history.
1) Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Sort by : Find a contact in an
alphabetical order.
3) Download : Download contacts
entries

(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the
contact download feature has been
turned off within the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts.
If downloading does not normally
occur, check the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more information of supported Bluetooth®
devices and function support,
refer to your phone’s user manual.

4 233
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Setting

Viewing Paired Phone List
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

Pairing a New Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section within Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.

This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

4 234
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

: Moves to the previous
screen
2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connection priority

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWNLOADING CONTACTS
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

Auto Download (Contacts)
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Auto Download]

As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.

This feature is used to automatically
download mobile contacts entries
Bluetooth® Wireless
once
a
Technology phone is connected.

✽ NOTICE
• The Auto Download feature will
download mobile contacts entries
every time the phone is connected. The
download time may differ depending
on the number of saved contacts
entries and the communication state.
• Before downloading contacts, first
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the contacts
download feature.
4 235

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Streaming Audio
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Streaming Audio]

Outgoing Volume
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

When Streaming Audio is turned on,
you can play music files saved in
your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device through the audio system.

Use the
,
buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.

Turning Bluetooth System Off
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off]
Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.

✽ NOTICE
While on a call, the volume can be
SEEK
changed by using the TRACK
key.

✽ NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and press “Yes
4 236
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

VOICE RECOGNITION

✽ NOTICE

Using Voice Recognition

For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and
beep tone.

Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
key on the
steering wheel remote controller. Say
a command.

4 237
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle
❈ Illustration on using voice commands

• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds):
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)

Ding~
More Help

• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the

Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)

Ding~
Contacts

• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds):

Contacts
Please say the name of the contacts you want
to call (BEEP)

Please say a...

Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)

key (under 0.8 seconds):

Cancel

(BEEP)
Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)

More Help

4 238
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command
More Help
Help
Call
Phone

Favorites
Call History
Contacts
(Call by Name)

Dial Number

Redial
Tutorial

Function
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Calls saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions.
Display the Favorite screen.
Displays the Call History screen.
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Connects the most recently called number.
Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth® connections.

Command

Function

• When listening to the radio, displays the
Radio

FM1(FM One)
FM2(FM Two)
AM
FM Preset 1~6
AM Preset 1~6
FM 87.5~107.9
AM 530~1710
XM (Satellite)

next radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟
XM2➟XM3➟FM1)
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
• When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
Displays the FM1 screen.
Displays the FM2 screen.
Displays the AM screen.
Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
• When currently listening to the SiriusXMTM,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXMTM screen.

4 239
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Command
XM (Satellite) 1~3
XM Channel
0~255

Function
Displays the selected SiriusXMTM screen.
Plays the selected SiriusXMTM channel.

Media

Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Plays the music saved in the CD.
Plays USB music.
Plays iPod music.

CD
USB
iPod®

Command
Function
My Music
Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary)
Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
device.
Please repeat
Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute
Mutes the sound
Cancel (Exit)
Ends voice command.

4 240
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

• FM/AM radio commands: available during FM, AM
radio operation
Command
Preset 1~6
Scan
Preset Scan
Information

Function
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Displays the information of the current broadcast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)

• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command
Channel 0~255
Scan
Preset 1~6
Information

4 241
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Track 1~30

Function
Plays the currently paused track.
Pauses the current track.
Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.
Plays the desired track number.

• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during USB and MP3 CD operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Next Folder
Previous Folder

4 242
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Function
Plays the currently paused file.
Pauses the current file.
Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Play the first file in the next folder
Play the first file in the previous folder

Features of your vehicle

• iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod®
operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off

Function
Plays the currently paused song.
Pauses the current song.
Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.
Repeats the current song.
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Delete

Function
Plays the currently paused file.
Pauses the current file.
Randomly plays all saved files.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.

4 243
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

SETUP

Display Settings

Starting Mode
Press the
Setup screen.

SETUP

key to display the

You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound],
[Clock/Calendar],
[Phone]
and
[System].

Adjusting the Brightness
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]

Use the
,
buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Daylight, or
Night mode.
Press the Default button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Daylight : Always maintains the
brightness on high
3) Night: Always maintains the
brightness on low

4 244
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Pop-up Mode
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]

This feature is used to display the
Pop-up Mode screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the RADIO or MEDIA key
will display the Pop-up Mode screen.

✽ NOTICE
The media Pop-up Mode screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.

Features of your vehicle

Text Scroll
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] Select [Text Scroll]

MP3 Information Display
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] Select [Media Display]

This feature is used to scroll text displayed on the screen when it is too
long to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeatedly scrolled. When turned off, the
text is scrolled just once.

This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.

Sound Settings
Sound Settings
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]

1) Folder File : Displays file name
and folder name
2) Album Artist Song : Displays
album name/artist name/song

4 245
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Use the
,
,
,
buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the
,
buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the Default button to reset.

SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]

The volume level is controlled automatically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from Off/Low/Mid/High.

4 246
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Voice Recognition Volume
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]

Turn the
TUNE knob to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.

Features of your vehicle

Touch Screen Beep
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]
Select [Touch Screen Beep]

Blue Link Voice Volume
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]
Select [Blue Link Voice Vol.]

This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.

Turn the
TUNE knob to adjust the
Blue Link Voice Volume.
❈ Blue Link® may differ depending
on the selected audio.

System Setting
Memory Information
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]

This feature displays information
related to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity

4 247
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Prompt Feedback
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System] Select [Prompt Feedback]

Language
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System] Select [Language]

This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
ON and OFF.
1) ON : When using voice recognition,
provides detailed guidance prompts
2) OFF : When using voice recognition, omits some guidance prompts

4 248
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

REAR VIEW CAMERA
(if equipped)
• The system has been equipped
with a rear view camera for user
safety by allowing a wider rear
range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automatically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the shift lever is
set to R (Revers).
• The rear view camera will automatically stop operating when shift
lever is selected out of R (Reverse).

CAUTION
• The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens
to provide a wider range of
vision and may appear different from the actual distance.
For safety, directly check the
rear and left/right sides.

4 249
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Blue Link® (if equipped)

Using the Room Mirror Key

Hyundai aims to offer differentiated
customer
values
through
a
‘Connected Car Life,’ which is to provide consumers with fast and reliable
IT technology. As consumers’ lifestyles
become more and more mobile in
thanks to remarkable advances in
smart phones, tablet PCs and overall
wireless telecommunication, new
lifestyle patterns demand seamless
connection between one’s office,
home, outdoors and automobiles.
Automobile companies are now faced
with the task of shifting their paradigm
from vehicle-centered services to customer value-centered services, with
the ultimate goal of securing global
leadership in the field of vehicle IT and
telematics.

Selecting the room mirror key will
allow you to make service required
inquiries, POI info searches, and
emergency rescues by connecting to
the Blue Link® Center.
Such features can be used only after
subscribing to the Blue Link® service.

Hyundai plans to achieve this by realizing a terminal platform flexible to
changes in IT technology, cooperating with global IT companies, creating an eco-system and providing the
latest contents & services based on
an open environment.

➁
(Blue Link® for POI)
• Blue Link® for Voice command
Starts Blue Link® voice command.
Voice receiving voice guidance,
shortly press the button to convert to
voice command mode. Press and
hold the button to end voice command.
• TBT VR Commands
1. Navigate to
“Navigate to” voice command is used
to request the download of route
data for a new destination, saved
destinations, daily routes and previous destinations.

➀
(Blue Link® Center)
Makes requests for Blue Link® service related inquiries and consultations.
A call is connected to the Blue Link®
service center employee.
Re-pressing the key will end the call.
This feature does not operate when
you are on a Bluetooth® phone call.

4 250
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2. Save Destination
“Save Destination” VR command is
used to assign a voice tag to the last
downloaded destination and store it
in a destination directory.
NOTE:
The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature supports the store of ten(10) destinations in the TBT destinations directory.

Features of your vehicle

3. Route Preview
“Route Preview” VR command allows
the user to preview the route instructions (upcoming maneuver instructions) at any time during the route
guidance.
4. Destinations List
“Destinations List” VR command
allows the user to preview and delete
the stored destinations with their
associated voice tags in the Turn by
Turn destinations directory.
5. Voice Guidance
“Voice Guidance” VR command allows
the user to mute/unmute the Turn by
Turn(TBT) direction announcements.

7. Resume Route
“Resume Route” VR command
allows the user to resume Turn by
Turn(TBT) route guidance.
➂
(Blue Link® for SOS)
In the case of an emergency,
requests for help to the Blue Link®
center.
Call is connected to the Blue Link®
emergency rescue center. Re-pressing the key will end the call.
If already on a Bluetooth® phone call,
the call will end to connect you to the
Blue Link® Emergency Rescue
Center.

CAUTION
• You cannot talk simultaneously on the Bluetooth® phone
and Blue Link® phone.
• While on a Bluetooth® call,
pressing the
key or
key will display a message
indicating that you are currently on a call.
• A message will be displayed if
you receive a Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
call while already on a Blue
Link® call. At this time, press
the
key on the steering
wheel remote controller to
accept the call. The phone bell
will not ring.

6. Suspend Route
“Suspend Route” VR command
allows the user to suspend and
pause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guidance while in the guidance mode.

4 251
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Eco Coach

• What is Eco Coach?
Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach compares your fuel economy against the
government tested average (EPA) or
other similar Hyundai models (community), based on your preference.
Each month, or after every tank fill
up, Eco Coach rates your extended
average and gives you a reward star
if you best the average.
See your My Hyundai web page for
more information.

• What does the bar graph and horizontal line mean?
The horizontal line is adjusted once
per month or at each tank full, based
on your preference; it represents the
EPA combined average or community average fuel economy target.
• What is My Eco MPG?
Your actual fuel economy average
over 2.5 minutes.
This value is also shown in bar graph
as your “now” rating.
• What are Eco Rewards?
If you beat the average (the EPA or
community), you will receive an Eco
Reward point.
See your my Hyundai web page for
more information.
[Eco Driving] will not operate if the
vehicle ignition is not turned on.
Please operate with the ignition
turned on.

4 252
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Features of your vehicle

Turn by Turn
The Turn by Turn feature can be used
through Blue Link®.

4.Next Street name
5.Distance to destination
6.Expected Time Arrival
7. Current Street name
❈ For information on specific
Blue Link® operations, please refer
to a separate manual.

1.Direction Indicator Image
2.Remaining distance until next point
3.The Count bar is divided into a
total of 9 levels.
9 Level
7 Level
5 Level
3 Level
1 Level

0.5mi
0.3mi
0.1mi
300ft
100ft

8 Level 0.4mi
6 Level 0.2mi
4 Level 400ft
2 Level 200ft

4 253
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:25 PM

Page 254

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM1B0MDKN F/L, AM1B0MDAN F/L, AM1B1MDAN F/L

4 254
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:25 PM

Page 255

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM180MDKN F/L, AM180MDAN F/L

❋ No

logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

4 255
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:25 PM

Page 256

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit

4 256
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:25 PM

Page 257

Features of your vehicle

13. FOLDER
• Radio Mode
- SiriusXMTM RADIO : Category
Search
• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder
Search
• iPod mode: Moves to parent folder
❈May differ depending on the selected audio.
4 257

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 258

Features of your vehicle

Audio Head Unit
(For NON Bluetooth model)

14. FM/AM
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM.
15. SAT
• Changes to SiriusXMTM mode.

4 258
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 259

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM110MDAN F/L

❋ No

will be shown if the SiriusXMTM feature is not supported.

4 259
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 260

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM110MDAN F/L

❋ No
❋ No

will be shown if the SiriusXMTM feature is not supported.
logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

4 260
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 261

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit

1.
(EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2. RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM/XM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 262

Features of your vehicle

8. DISP
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it
sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.

9. SCAN
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broad1
casts saved in Preset
~
6
for 5 seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈ XM Radio does not support the
Preset scan feature.
• CD, USB, iPod mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
10. SETUP
• Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Phone, System setting
modes

4 262
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

11. MENU
• Displays menus for the current
mode.
12. TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod mode: Searches
songs (files) by turning the knob
left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus
13. FOLDER
• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder
Search
• iPod mode: Moves to parent folder
❈ May differ depending on the
selected audio.

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 263

Features of your vehicle

Audio Head Unit
(For NON Bluetooth model)

14. FM
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2.
15. AM
• Changes to AM mode.

4 263
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 264

Features of your vehicle

SETUP
Display Settings
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] through
TUNE knob or
1
key Select menu through
TUNE knob

Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes On / Off
selection mode
• During On state, press the RADIO
or MEDIA key to display the mode
change pop up screen.

Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

4 264
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 265

Features of your vehicle

SOUND SETTINGS

Speed Dependent Volume
Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [SDVC] Turn SDVC On/Off
by pressing the
Tune knob.

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Sound] through
TUNE knob or
2
key Select menu through
TUNE knob

4 265
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 266

Features of your vehicle

Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE knob

4 266
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 267

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM SETTINGS
Press the SETUP key Select [System]
through tune knob or 4 key Select
menu through
TUNE knob

Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through TUNE
knob

❈The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol

4 267
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 268

Features of your vehicle

RADIO : FM, AM OR
SIRIUSXMTM

SEEK

Preset SEEK

SCAN

SEEK

Press the TRACK key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically searches for the next frequency.

Selecting through manual
search
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 10KHz

4 268
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 269

Features of your vehicle

MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.

4 269
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 270

Features of your vehicle

SIRIUSXMTM RADIO

SEEK

Category
SEEK
TRACK

4 270
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

CAT
Press the FOLDER
the
TUNE knob

key Set through

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 271

Features of your vehicle

Preset

Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the MENU key
Select [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or 1 key

Info (Information)

Tune
• Rotate
TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls category list.
• Press
TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.

Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.

4 271
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 272

Features of your vehicle

BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod® / My Music
Press the MEDIA key to change the
mod mode in order of CD ➟
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.

Repeat

Random

The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
❈The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.

4 272
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 273

Features of your vehicle

Changing Song/File
SEEK
TRACK

Scan

Searching Songs (File)

While song (file) is playing SCAN key
Scans all songs for 10 seconds starting from the next song.
❈Press the SCAN key again to turn
off.
❈The SCAN function is not supported in iPod mode.

• Turning
TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing
TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
CAT

4 273
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 274

Features of your vehicle

MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode
to set the Repeat,
Information features.

Random
key
Random,

Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.

Information

Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1
key to repeat the current song.
❈Press RPT again to turn off.

Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key to display information of the current song.
❈Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

4 274
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 275

Features of your vehicle

MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Folder Repeat

Copy

Press the CD MP3 mode MENU key
to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.

Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key to repeat songs within the current folder.
❈Press F.RPT again to turn off.

Press the MENU key Set [ Copy]
through the
TUNE knob or 6
key.
This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copying is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.

All Random

Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1
key to repeat the current song.
❈Press RPT again to turn off.

Folder Random
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Press the MENU key Set [ A.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 4 key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD.
❈Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 5
key to display information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

4 275
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 276

Features of your vehicle

MENU : iPod®

Information

MENU : My Music Mode

In iPod® mode, press the MENU key
to set the Repeat, Random,
Information and Search features.

Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

In My Music mode, press the MENU
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.

Search
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Press the MENU key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE knob or 4
key.
Displays iPod® category list.
❈Searching iPod® category is
MENU key pressed, move to parent category.

Random

Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or 1 key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.

Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 2 key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing folder in random order.
❈Press RDM again to turn random
off.

4 276
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 277

Features of your vehicle

Information

Delete All

AUX

Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or 3 key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.

Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or 5 key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete Selection
Press the MENU key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or 6 key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.

❈AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
➁After selecting, press the MENU
key and select the delete menu.

➁Press the MENU key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
4 277
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 278

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology AUDIO
Bluetooth®

What is
Technology?

Wireless

Starting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the MEDIA key to change
the mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will
start playing.
❈Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.

4 278
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the
TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.

❈The play / pause functions may not
be supported in some mobile
phones.

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 279

Features of your vehicle

PHONE (IF EQUIPPED)

Making a call using the Steering
wheel remote controller

❈The actual feature in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.

1.VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2.MUTE button : Mute the microphone during a call.
3.
button : Places and transfers
calls.
4.
button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.

4 279
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:26 PM

Page 280

Features of your vehicle

4 280
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 281

Features of your vehicle

Pairing PHONE Key /
Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the PHONE key or the
key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.

2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.

1) Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.

5. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

4 281
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 282

Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE

4 282
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 283

Features of your vehicle

Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the SETUP key
Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob

•
•
•
1.The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.

•

4 283
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 284

Features of your vehicle

Connecting a Device

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected

4 284
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 285

Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE

Disconnecting a Device

Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priority
phone.

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.

4 285
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 286

Features of your vehicle

Deleting a Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.

4 286
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 287

Features of your vehicle

USING Bluetooth®
WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY
(IF EQUIPPED)
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device connected, press the PHONE
key to display the Phone menu screen.

1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number

4 287
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 288

Favorites
Press the
[Favorites]

Call History
PHONE

key

Select

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.

4 288
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Press the
History]

PHONE

key

Select [Call

A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call history stored or a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 289

Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE

Contacts
Press the
[Contacts]

PHONE

key Select

The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the MENU key.

4 289
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 290

Features of your vehicle

WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.

Pairing a New Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Viewing Paired Phone List
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

4 290
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 291

Features of your vehicle

Downloading Contacts
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.

4 291
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 292

Features of your vehicle

Outgoing Volume
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Use
TUNE knob to adjust the outgoing volume level.

✽ NOTICE
While on a call, the volume can be
SEEK
changed by using the TRACK
key.

4 292
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

✽ NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and select “Yes”.

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 293

Features of your vehicle

VOICE RECOGNITION

✽ NOTICE

Using Voice Recognition

For proper recognition, say the command after the voice instruction and
beep tone.

Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
key on the
steering wheel. Say a command.

4 293
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 294

Features of your vehicle

ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the
key on the
steering remote controller

4 294
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 295

Features of your vehicle

Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds):
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)

Beep~
More Help

• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the

Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)

while guidance message is being stated

Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)

Contacts

Contacts.
Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.

• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds):
Please say a...

key (under 0.8 seconds):

Cancel

(BEEP)
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
More Help

4 295
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 296

Features of your vehicle

Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command
More Help
Help
Call
Call
on Mobile
Call
in Office
Call
at Home
Call
on Other
Phone

Favorites
Call History

Function
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Calls saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Display the Favorite screen.
Displays the Call History screen.

Command
Contacts
(Call by Name)

Dial Number

Redial
Tutorial

Radio

FM1(FM One)
FM2(FM Two)
AM

4 296
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Function
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Connects the most recently called number.
Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth® connections.
• When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟
XM2➟XM3➟FM1)
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
• When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
Displays the FM1 screen.
Displays the FM2 screen.
Displays the AM screen.

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 297

Features of your vehicle

Command
FM Preset 1~6
AM Preset 1~6
FM 87.5~107.9
AM 530~1710
SiriusXMTM

SiriusXMTM 1~3
SiriusXMTM
Channel 0~255
Media
CD
USB
iPod®

Function
Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
• When currently listening to the SiriusXMTM,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXMTM screen.
Displays the selected XM screen.
Plays the selected XM channel.

Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Plays the music saved in the CD.
Plays USB music.
Plays iPod music.

4 297
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 298

Features of your vehicle

• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during
FM, AM radio operation
Command
Preset 1~6
Scan
Preset Scan
Information

• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command
Channel 0~255
Scan
Preset 1~6
Information

4 298
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 299

Features of your vehicle

• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Track 1~30

• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during USB and MP3 CD operation
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Information
Next Folder
Previous Folder

4 299
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 300

Features of your vehicle

• iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod®
operation
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off

Function
Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.
Repeats the current song.
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Delete

4 300
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 301

Features of your vehicle

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless
Technologyaudio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation
Command
Play
Pause

Function
Plays the currently paused song.
Pauses the current song.

4 301
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 302

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM9B0MDKN, AM9B0MDAN, AM9B1MDAN

4 302
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 303

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM980MDKN, AM980MDAN

❋ No

logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

4 303
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 304

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit

1.
(EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.

4 304
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SEEK

6. TRACK
• When pressed shortly(under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next
frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : changes the track,
Song(file)
• When pressed and held (Over 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : continuously
changes the frequency. Upon
release, plays the current frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls
the call volume.
CAT

7. FOLDER
• XM RADIO™ : Category Search
• CD/USB/MP3 mode : Search Folder

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 305

Features of your vehicle

8. DISP
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
9. MUTE
When the button is pressed,
stopssound and "Audio Mute" is displayedon LCD.

Audio Head Unit
(For NON Bluetooth model)

14. FM/AM
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM.
15. SAT
• Changes to SiriusXMTM mode.

4 305
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:27 PM

Page 306

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM910MDAN
14. RESET
• Forced system termination and system
restart.

❋ No

will be shown if the SiriusXMTM feature is not supported.

4 306
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 307

Features of your vehicle

■ CD

Player : AM900MDAN

❋ No
❋ No

will be shown if the SiriusXMTM feature is not supported.
logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

4 307
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 308

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit

1.
(EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.

4 308
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SEEK
TRACK

mode

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 309

Features of your vehicle

8. DISP
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
9. MUTE
When the button is pressed,
stopssound and "Audio Mute" is displayedon LCD.

Audio Head Unit
(For NON Bluetooth model)

11. SETUP
Converts to Setup mode.
12.
TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change broadcast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
modes : turn to search tracks/ channels/files.

13.

• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2.
14. AM
• Changes to AM mode.

4 309
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 310

Features of your vehicle

❈ The actual feature in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.

1. VOLUME
• Used to control volume.

3. MUTE
• Mutes audio volume.

Making a call using the
Steering-wheel mounted controls

4 310
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 311

Features of your vehicle

7.
• Ends phone call

4 311
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 312

Features of your vehicle

SIRIUSXM™ RADIO MODE
Features of your vehicle
Satellite radio reception

• If you are driving in a valley where
the surrounding hills or peaks
block the signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving on a mountain
road where is the signal blocked by
mountains.

SATELLITE1

SATELLITE2

4 312
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 313

Features of your vehicle

Basic Mode Screen

4 313
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 314

Features of your vehicle

Using SEEK
SEEK
TRACK

Press the
key to play the
previous/next channel.
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.

Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
CAT
key and press the
FOLDER
TUNE knob to select.

Selecting Presets/Saving
Presets
Press the Preset button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.

Using Tune
Turn the
TUNE knob to select the
desired channel.

Channels for the selected category
are played.

Press the 1 ~ 6
the desired preset.

buttons to play

✽ NOTICE
While listening to a channel you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the 1 ~ 6 preset
buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
the current channel to the selected
preset.

4 314
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 315

Features of your vehicle

4 315
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 316

Features of your vehicle

MEDIA MODE

Title Icon

Pressing the MEDIA key will change
the operating mode in order of CD ➟
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.

When a Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology, iPod®, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.

Icon

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
SETUP [Display], then pressing the
MEDIA key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the
TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.

Title
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
CD
iPod®
USB
AUX

✽ NOTICE
The media mode pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are two
or more media modes turned on.

4 316
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 317

Features of your vehicle

AUDIO CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating function.

8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
Moves to the list screen.

3. Track Info
Displays information about the current track.

4 317
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 318

Features of your vehicle

Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.

Changing Tracks
SEEK
Press the TRACK
key to move to
the previous or next track.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

Selecting from the List
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.

button
button to

Once you find the desired track,
press the
TUNE knob to start
playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
SEEK
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
TRACK
rewind or fast-forward the current
track.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

4 318
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 319

Features of your vehicle

Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current disc.

List
Press the List button to display the
track list screen.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.

4 319
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 320

Features of your vehicle

MP3 CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen

4. File Info
Displays information about the current file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.

Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.

6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file.

1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file number.

8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen.

4 320
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP

8/28/2014

5:28 PM

Page 321